TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
WARNING!
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine Mopar parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner manual:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
5
1
Common Icons
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures, which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures,
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
driver’s front corner of the instrument panel, visible
through the windshield. This number also appears on the
vehicle registration or title.
Vehicle Identification Number
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
(Rear Doors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
9
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Ignition Key Removal
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
Automatic Transaxle
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to
the ACC position, push the key and cylinder inward,
rotate the key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.
Ignition Key Position
Vehicle Key
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place
the lever in PARK, the key may become trapped tempo-
rarily in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key
to the right slightly, then remove the key as described. If
a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
2
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, and power
outlets, will remain active for up to 45 seconds after the
ignition switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle
front door will cancel this feature.
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ACC, or ON positions, and
the brake pedal is depressed.
WARNING!
NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE: With either front door open, and the key in the
ignition, both the power door locks and Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) will not function.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locking Doors With The Key
There is only one external door lock cylinder which is
located in the driver’s door only.
immediately after the ignition switch is turned on for a
bulb check. Afterwards, if the bulb remains on, this
indicates a problem with the electronics.
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the
key forward. See Section 7 of this manual for door lock
lubrication.
If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check, this
indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the
vehicle. Both of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two (2) seconds of running.
Keep in mind that a key, which has not been pro-
grammed is also considered an invalid key even if it is
cut to fit the ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine.
The system will shut the engine off after 2 seconds of
running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle. This
system utilizes ignition keys which have an electronic
chip (transponder) embedded into them. Only keys that
have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle.
If the Theft Alarm/Immobilizer Light comes on during
normal vehicle operation, (the vehicle has been running
for longer than 10 seconds), a fault has been detected in
the electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon
as possible.
NOTE:
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be
armed or activated. Operation of the system is automatic
regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or
unlocked. During normal operation, the Theft Alarm/
Immobilizer Light will come on for three (3) seconds
•
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
•
Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
any other transponder equipped components on the
same keychain will not cause a key-related (tran-
sponder) fault unless the additional part is physi-
cally held against the ignition key being used
when starting the vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or
other RF electronics will not cause interference with
this system.
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key is one, which has never been
programmed.
2
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
dealer.
Sentry Key Programming
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
valid sentry keys by performing the following procedure:
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the first key.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit PIN number. This number is required
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds, a chime
will sound and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds a single chime will sound. The Theft Alarm Light
will stop flashing, turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Theft Security Alarm (VTSA) system moni-
tors the doors, trunk, and ignition switch for unautho-
rized operation.
The new Sentry Key has been programmed.
If something triggers the alarm, the system will signal for
about 18 minutes. For the first 3 minutes, the horn will
sound intermittently and the headlights, park lights,
taillights and the indicator light in the cluster will flash.
Then the exterior lights will flash for another 15 minutes.
Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys. If you do
not have a programmed sentry key, contact your dealer
for details.
General Information
Rearming of the System:
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the system will turn off the horn after 3
minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes,
and then the system will rearm itself.
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
To Arm the System:
1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out
of the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the power door lock switch
or the Keyless Entry Transmitter, and close all doors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
3. The indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash
rapidly for 16 seconds. This shows that the system is
arming. During this period, if a door is opened, the
ignition switch is turned ON, or the power door locks are
unlocked in any manner, the system will automatically
disarm. After 16 seconds, the indicator light will flash
slowly. This shows that the system is fully armed.
•
•
The system remains armed during trunk entry. Press-
ing the trunk button will not disarm the system. If
someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and
opens any door, the alarm will sound.
2
When the system is armed, the interior power door
lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect
your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
system will arm regardless of whether you are in the
vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
system.
NOTE: For added security, whenever the Security
Alarm is armed, the Homelink/Garage Door Opener (if
equipped) is disabled as well.
To Disarm the System:
Either press the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter or insert a valid sentry key into the
ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON/START
position.
If the alarm system is armed and the battery becomes
disconnected the system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, the
horn will sound, and the ignition will not start the
vehicle. If this occurs, disarm the system.
NOTE:
•
The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the keyless entry transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Tamper Alert
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless
entry transmitter or open the doors. This feature is only
available if you have Remote Keyless Entry.
If the alarm was triggered, but the warning signals have
timed out, the park and taillights flash three times
(instead of the normal twice) when unlocking the vehicle
with a valid Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to
alert the driver.
The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they
will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is
turned on.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Theft Security Alarm (VTSA) system will not
arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock
plunger.
NOTE:
•
The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the interior lights ON position (extreme top position).
•
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position).
Manual Lock Plunger
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
To unlock the doors:
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
trunk or activate the panic alarm from distances a maxi-
mum of 66 feet (20 meters) using a hand held radio
transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock
all the doors. When the UNLOCK button is pressed, the
illuminated entry will initiate, the parking lights will
flash on twice, and the headlights will remain on. The
time for headlamp delay is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Headlamps Off Delay” under “Personal
Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) section of this manual for details.
2
NOTE: The system can also be programmed to unlock
all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button. On
electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped
vehicles refer to “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st”
under “Personal Settings” in the EVIC section of this
manual. On non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the
following steps:
Five Button Vehicle Key
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors
upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the
following procedure:
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
key fob.
To lock the doors:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the
horn will chip once to acknowledge the lock signal. If
desired, the “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be
turned on or off. On electronic vehicle information center
(EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to “Personal Settings” in
the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” sec-
tion of this manual. On non EVIC – equipped vehicles
perform the following steps:
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds,
but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the
UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to indicate
that this feature has changed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the keyfob.
1. Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while
you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after 4 seconds),
press the PANIC button. Release both buttons.
The “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be reactivated by
repeating this procedure.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
To Unlatch the Trunk:
Press the trunk button on the transmitter two times to
unlatch the trunk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Using The Express Down Window Feature — If
Equipped
The key fob remotely lowers both driver and passenger
front windows simultaneously. Lowering the front win-
dows using the key fob is a two step operation:
NOTE: When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system.
2
To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock”
1. Press the unlock button once.
NOTE: The “Flash Lights With Lock” feature can be
turned on or off. On electronic vehicle information center
(EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to ЉPersonal SettingsЉ in
the EVIC section of this manual. On non EVIC - equipped
vehicles perform the following steps:
2. Press the unlock button a second time and hold the
button until the glass lowers completely or the windows
drop to the desired level
Using The Panic Alarm:
To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
1. Press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after 4 sec-
onds) press the LOCK button. Release both buttons.
3. Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside
of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the key
fob with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the key
removed.
The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you
turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or
if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
The “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob, while
you are in the vehicle, will activate the Security Alarm.
Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to
deactivate the Security Alarm.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions.
To Program Transmitters:
Refer to SENTRY KEY “Sentry Key Programming.”
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of
batteries is five years.
If you do not have a programmed transmitter, contact
your dealer for details.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a flat
blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart. Make
sure not to damage the seal during removal.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Remote Start System — If Equipped
Remote start conveniently starts the engine from outside
the vehicle by using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key
fob while maintaining security. The system has a targeted
range of 328 ft. (100 m). The vehicle must be locked, the
deck lid and hood closed and the transmission in Park in
order to start the engine using the Remote Start button on
the key fob.
2
NOTE: Remote start requires automatic transaxle
equipped vehicles.
How To Use Remote Start
Separating Transmitter Halves
To enter the Remote Start mode, depress the Remote
Start button twice on the key fob. The engine will start
and the vehicle will remain in the remote start mode for
a 15 minute cycle.
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To assemble the transmitter case, snap the two halves
together.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
cycle, the key must be cycled to the ignition RUN
position and then repeat the start sequence.
To shut off the vehicle when it is in Remote Start mode,
press the remote start button once. In order to avoid
inadvertent shut downs, the one-time press to shut down
the vehicle will be disabled for two seconds after receipt
of a valid remote start request.
NOTE: When the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode,
power window and sunroof operation are disabled for
security.
The following conditions must be met before the engine
will remote start:
REMOTE START BUTTON
To exit the Remote Start mode, allow the
engine to run the cycle or depress the unlock
button to disarm the Vehicle Theft Security
Alarm and within one minute insert the key
into the ignition and turn the ignition to the RUN
position. The ignition must be in the RUN position in
order to drive the vehicle.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Automatic Transaxle in Park
All doors are closed
Hood is closed
Hazard Switch is off
Brake Switch is inactive
Key is not in the ignition
NOTE: The engine can be started two consecutive times
(two 15 minute cycles) by using the key fob. For a third
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
•
•
Battery is at an acceptable charge level
Panic button on key fob is not depressed
WARNING!
For personal security, and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
2
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the
keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal inju-
ries and death.
Manual Lock Plunger
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Door Locks—If Equipped
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock
all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
1. The Auto Lock feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
Power Door Locks
A door lock switch is located on the driver and passenger
door panel. Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter.
The Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Pro-
grammable Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC) — if equipped section of this manual
for details.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Automatic
Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by performing the
following procedure:
Power Door Lock Switch
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK, and ON,
and back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK
position.
Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped section of this manual.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Auto
Unlock Feature can be enabled or disabled by performing
the following procedure:
2
3. Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
Auto Unlock
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK, and ON and
back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position.
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
3. Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the
doors.
1. The Auto Unlock feature is enabled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
NOTE: Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock
features in accordance with local laws.
“Child-Protection” Door Lock System (Rear
Doors)
The Rear Door Child-Protection Locks are located inside
the rear edge of the door. Insert the tip of the ignition key
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled.
Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Programmable
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
or similar flat-bladed object into the lock and rotate
approximately ⁄4 turn to the lock or unlock position (as
indicated by the stamped icons).
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock plunger up (unlocked position), roll down
the window, and open the door with the outside door
handle.
1
POWER WINDOWS
Power Window Switches
The control on the left front door has up-down switches
that give you fingertip control of all four power win-
dows. There is a single opening and closing switch on the
front passenger door and one each on rear doors for
window control. The windows will operate only when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and for
45 seconds after the ignition is turned OFF or the driver’s
door is opened. This feature can be turned off by your
authorized dealer.
Child Lock Control
WARNING!
Auto Window Down (Express Down) — If
Equipped
The driver’s window switch has an Auto Down feature
for both the driver and passenger front windows. The tab
is labeled “AUTO” to indicate this capability. Push the
window switch past the first detent, release, and the
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
window will go down automatically. To cancel the Auto
Down movement, operate the switch either in the up or
down direction and release the switch.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
2
The power window switches will remain active for up to
45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned off. Open-
ing either front door will cancel this feature. The time for
this feature is programmable. For details, refer to “Delay
Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Sec-
tion 4 of this manual.
Auto Window Up (Express Up) with Anti–Pinch
Protection — If Equipped
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
Power Window Auto Up / Auto Down Switches
NOTE: The convenience of one-touch down front win-
dows, can also be controlled by using the remote key fob
— if equipped.
To stop the window from going all the way up, during
the auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window lock button. To enable the window controls,
press the window control button again.
NOTE:
•
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then stop. Remove
the obstacle and use the window switch again to close
the window.
•
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury, be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
Window Lockout Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Reset Express Up
TRUNK RELEASE
Any time the vehicle battery is disconnected, or goes
dead, the auto-up function will be disabled. To reactivate
the auto-up feature, pull the window switch up to close
the window completely and continue to hold the switch
up for an additional two seconds after the window is
closed.
Use the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to open the
trunk from outside the vehicle. From inside the car the
trunk lid can be released by depressing the Trunk Release
Button located on the instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel. The transmission must be in Park before
the switch will operate.
2
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
Trunk Release Button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
With the ignition ON, the word “deck” will display in
place of the odometer display indicating that the trunk is
open. The odometer display will reappear once the trunk
is closed or if the trip button is depressed.
Trunk Internal Emergency Release
With the key in the lock position or with the key out, the
word “deck” will display until the trunk is closed.
On EVIC equipped vehicles, the words “Trunk Ajar” will
display.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Interior Trunk Emergency Release
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
NOTE: As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emer-
gency Release lever is built into the trunk latching
mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked
inside the trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by
pulling on the glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the
trunk latching mechanism. See picture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
•
•
Front seat belt retractors incorporate pretensioners to
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event.
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. The following safety
features are standard on all vehicles:
2
All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR’s) which lock the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat.
•
•
•
Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
Pretensioning and load-limiting retractors for the front
seat belts
Advanced multistage driver and new active-vent front
passenger airbags
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-size
seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature also can
be used to hold infant and child restraint systems.
•
•
Knee Bolsters/Blockers for front seat occupants
An energy absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
NOTE: The front airbags have a multi stage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on collision severity.
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
that span the front and second rows for sedans.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
•
•
Supplemental seat side (Thorax) airbags for sedans.
Supplemental seat side and head airbags for convert-
ibles.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/
Shoulder Belts.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will
lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
WARNING!
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
•
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best.
•
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Pulling Out the Latch Plate
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
WARNING!
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside sur-
faces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head
and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your
strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
2
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
Positioning the Lap Belt
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the belt away from
your neck. Push anchorage button to release the anchor-
age, and move it up or down to the position that serves
you best.
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
2
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode – If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is avail-
able on all passenger seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger
seating position. Children 12 years old and under should
be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible.
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap/shoulder belt.
Adjustable Anchorage
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the automatic locking mode.
In addition, the front passenger seat belt includes a
two-stage load-limiting feature to enhance occupant pro-
tection for the same reason.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the automatic lock-
ing mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) (see Airbag Section). Like the
front airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. After
a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and
pretensioners, both must be replaced.
Rear Seat Belts
Three point belts are nonadjustable for outboard and
center rear passengers on sedans. The center belt is
mounted to the rear shelf panel and exits through a bezel
in the panel.
BeltAlertா Enhanced Warning System
If the occupied driver’s seat belt has not been buckled
within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced
Warning System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle
their seat belt. The driver should also instruct all other
occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is
triggered, the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will
continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light
for 96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reacti-
vated if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than
10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8
km/h).
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.
It may be necessary to retract the seat belt partially each
time when unbuckling.
2
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have success-
fully completed the programming.
Belt Alert Programming
BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer or by following these steps:
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti-
vated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recom-
mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert).
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending
with the seat belt buckled.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Extender
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your dealer can
provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender
should be used only if the existing belt is not long
enough. When it is not required, remove the extender,
and stow it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Front Airbag Components
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
•
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
— If Equipped
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
Front Seat— side mounted (Thorax) Airbags — If
Equipped
2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Front Impact Sensors
This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to
protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next
to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with window
bags, they are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
Side Impact Sensors (If Equipped)
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Interconnecting Wiring
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim; but they will open to allow airbag deploy-
ment.
Seat Belt Reminder Light
Knee Impact Bolster
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
Front Seat Belt Buckle Pretensioners
•
•
•
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
AIRBAG Light
Driver Airbag
Front Passenger Airbag
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Seat Airbag Features
In addition to the small size, the inflating gasses exit
through strategically placed vents, which direct the gas
away from the occupant.
The front airbag system has dual-stage driver and front
passenger airbags. This system provides output appro-
priate to the level of crash severity as determined by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) and the impact
sensors at the front of the car.
Front Passenger Airbag Special Features
A new active venting front-passenger airbag is designed
to reduce the risk of occupants who may be out of
position by the use of active vents positioned on each
side of the airbag.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of
the second stage determines whether the output force is
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet
the need, the second stage is expended later in the crash
event.
Supplemental Front Seat-Mounted Thorax Side
Airbags
Front seat mounted side (Thorax) airbags provide en-
hanced protection and work together with supplemental
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to help protect
an occupant during a side impact. The seat-mounted side
airbag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the
outboard side of the seat.
Driver Airbag Special Features
Driver airbag deployment and force level is controlled by
the driver’s seat position as well as impact severity. Use
of special inflators, result in a very compact driver’s side
airbag.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Airbags offer side-impact protection to front and rear seat
outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the
body structure. Each airbag features inflated chambers
place adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that
reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries. The
curtains deploy downward, covering both windows on
the impact side.
2
Seat-mounted Side Airbag Label
When the bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each bag deploys
independently, that is a left side impact deploys the left
bag only and a right-side impact deploys only the right
bag.
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) Location
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim; but they will open to allow airbag deploy-
ment.
WARNING!
•
Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may dam-
age the airbags and you could be injured because
the airbags are not there to protect you. These
protective covers for the airbag cushions are de-
signed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and
rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy during
an impact severe enough to require airbag occupant
protection.
•
•
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the perfor-
mance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
window bags, do not stack luggage or other cargo
up high enough to block the location of the Side
Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC). The area
where the side curtain airbag is located should
remain free from any obstructions.
•
Do not attach cup holders or any other objects on or
around the door. The inflating side airbag could
drive the object into occupants, causing serious
injury.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
with seat belts and pretensioners, front airbags work with
the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the
driver and front passenger. Side airbags also work with
seat belts to improve occupant protection.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
2
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is equipped, the
side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in
moderate to severe side collisions. In certain types of
collisions, both the front and side airbags may be trig-
gered. However, even in collisions where the airbags
work, you need the seat belts to keep you in the right
position for the airbags to protect you properly.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. Refer to the section on Child Restraint.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder
belts properly.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags
room to inflate.
4. If your vehicle has side airbags, do not lean against
the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
•
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front airbag deployment could
cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate.
Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ؆If You Need Assistance؆ in Section 9 of this
manual.
Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
will deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The Occupant Restraint Controller System (ORC) is
part of a Federally regulated safety system required for
this vehicle.
2
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning
light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds
for a self-check when the ignition is first turned
on. After the self-check, the AIRBAG warning
light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any
part of the system, it turns on the AIRBAG warning light
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound if the light comes on again after initial start up.
The ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe
enough to require the airbags to inflate. Based on the
sensor signals, a central electronic Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) deploys the front airbags, side inflat-
able airbag curtains, seat-mounted side (Thorax) airbags,
and front seat belt pretensioners as required for each type
of impact.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster airbag warning lamp if a malfunction is
noted. The diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START
or RUN positions. These include all of the items listed
above except the steering wheel and column, instrument
panel, and passenger knee bolsters. If the key is in the
OFF position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition,
the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Side Inflatable Curtain and Front Seat Mounted
Airbags
WARNING!
The Occupant Restraint Controller System (ORC) de-
ploys the side inflatable curtain and seat mounted thorax
side airbags during collision with other vehicles and
during collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the vehicle — such as collisions with
poles, trees or similar objects.
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect
you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays
on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have the airbag system checked right away.
Impact Sensors
It will deploy the side inflatable curtains and front seat
thorax mounted airbags only on the impact side of the
vehicle.
Two sensors, located on the front body structure, trigger
airbag deployment in direct frontal impacts and aid the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) in determining
appropriate response to frontal impact events. Additional
sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deploy-
ment and provide verification.
The front driver and passenger seat contain inflatable
side airbags to protect the occupant from impact injuries.
Correctly functioning front passenger seat components
are critical for the Occupant Restraint Controller System
(ORC) to properly classify the front passenger and calcu-
late the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
WARNING!
•
Do not make any modifications to the front passenger
seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover in any
way.
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, or seat cover may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci-
dent. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS).
2
•
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
designated for the specific model being repaired. Al-
ways use the correct seat cover specified for the
vehicle.
•
•
•
Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover.
Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment,
with the vehicle stopped, and the vehicle communication
network intact, and the power intact, the Enhanced
Accident Response System performs the following func-
tions:
At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fas-
tener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/
Mopar.
•
•
Cuts off fuel to the engine.
Flashes hazard lights.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Turns on the interior lamps which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
Unlocks the doors automatically
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detect a moderate-
to-severe collision, to help restrain the driver and front
passenger, and then immediately deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
•
As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
•
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
2
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or
the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body struc-
ture, or add aftermarket side steps or running
boards.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly, replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
The AIRBAG light does not come on during the 6 to 8
seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced
airbag system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
any advanced airbag system service. If your seat
including your trim cover and cushion needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take
the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufac-
turer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is
necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for
persons with disabilities, contact your authorized
dealer.
•
•
The light remains on after the 6 to 8 second interval.
The light comes on and remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper airbag fuses. See your dealer if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to 5 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters
(see the following list) in an event data recorder prior to
the moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment,
and up to a quarter second of high-speed deceleration
data during and/or after airbag deployment. EDR data
are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or nearly
deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
NOTE:
the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the US govern-
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora-
tion to any third party except when:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn
more about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation, such investigations may
be requested by customers, insurance carriers, govern-
ment officials, and professional crash researchers, such as
those associated with universities, and with hospital and
insurance organizations.
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of litigation involving
DaimlerChrysler Corporation product
a
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative),
the company or its designated representative will first
obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times — babies and children, too. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
•
•
Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
ЉTimeЉ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
Impact acceleration and angle
WARNING!
Seatbelt status
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
Engine control status (including engine speed)
Transmission gear selection
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap
could become so great that you could not hold the
child, no matter how strong you are. The child and
others could be badly injured. Any child riding in
your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the
child’s size.
Cruise control status
Traction/stability control status
Tire pressure monitoring system status – If Equipped
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Infants And Small Children
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat owner’s
manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child.
Use the restraint that is correct for your child.
2
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system.
•
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old
and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types of child
restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers
and ЉconvertibleЉ child seats. Both types of child re-
straints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt
or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ЉConvertibleЉ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion while the
child’s back is against the seatback, then the child should
use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat. The child and booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
(Some booster seats are equipped with a front shield and
are held in the vehicle by the lap portion.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.
WARNING!
•
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
•
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag which may cause se-
vere or fatal injury to the infant.
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either
cinching latch plates or seat belt retractors that can be
switched to an automatic locking mode, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on
the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will
tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the
belt tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen
with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it
tight if necessary.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your
child restraint:
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
•
•
If the seat belt has a switchable retractor, it will have a
distinctive label. To operate the switchable retractor,
please refer to Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) in
this section.
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
2
NOTE: For additional information, refer online to
www.seatcheck.org.
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle seat belt. The outboard rear seating
positions have lower anchorages that are capable of
accommodating LATCH-compatible child seats having
flexible, webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child
seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in
the outboard positions only. Regardless of the specific
type of lower attachment, NEVER install LATCH-
compatible child seats such that two seats share a com-
mon lower anchorage. If you are installing LATCH-
compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating
positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehi-
cle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but you must use
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
•
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle’s seat belt at the center position. If your child
restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only in-
stall the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
Please refer to “Installing the Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchors
Child restraints systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the top tether anchorage have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for
most older vehicles.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchors
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars,
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seat back, and are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
surfaces.
2
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seat back and the rear
window. These tether strap anchorages are
under a plastic cover with this symbol on it.
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
seat cover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage
cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the
child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor-
age, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the
most direct path between the anchor and the child
restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat,
removing slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seat backs as you remove slack in
the strap.
•
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
Installing Child Restrain Tether Strap
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
2
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint
to the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap and Hook
B — Tether Anchor
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch-
ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder
belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will
keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt system will
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull
it tight if necessary.
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
Seat belts with an automatic locking retractor have a
distinctive label on the seat belt webbing. The seat belt
must be in the automatic locking mode in order to enable
a child restraint to be tightly installed. Refer to “Auto-
matic Locking Mode” in this section for details. A locking
clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking
feature is enabled. Position the shoulder and lap belt on
the child restraint. The automatic locking retractor is
activated by first attaching the child seat, then pulling all
of the webbing out of the retractor, then allowing back in.
Tighten webbing. To release, simply unbuckle the seat
belt by depressing the button, allowing the webbing to
retract into the retractor.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
•
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle.
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
2
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
•
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
Transporting Pets
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
WARNING!
If you are required to drive with the deck lid open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
WARNING!
Seat Belts
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow the safety tips below.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
Airbag Light
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
turned ON. If the LED is not lit during starting, have it
checked. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
2
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. In addition, if
gasoline fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid,
transmission fluid, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the
cause should be located and corrected immediately.
NOTE: If the defrost feature is not functioning, the
cause should be located and corrected immediately. The
windshield could fog up while driving and obscure your
visibility.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper pressure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
UConnect™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 69
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror— If Equipped
This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying head-
light glare from vehicles behind you. Push in the button
on the face of the mirror to activate the dimming feature.
Inside Day/Night Mirror— If Equipped
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical mirror adjustment.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Adjusting Manual Rear View Mirror
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 71
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
wipe the mirror clean.
3
Electric Remote-Control Mirrors
Both of the outside mirrors can be adjusted by using the
remote controls mounted on the driver’s door panel.
A rotary knob selects the left mirror, right mirror, or off
position.
Power Mirror Switch
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. When finished,
return the knob to the center “O” (Off) position to guard
against accidentally moving a mirror position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your right
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this
convex mirror.
Mirror Directions
Adjusting Side View Mirrors
Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ЉCall” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”WorkЉ or ЉDial”
ѧ “248-555-1212Љ). Your cellular phone’s audio is trans-
mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect™ system.
3
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ЉHands-Free Profile,Љ
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s micro-
phone for private conversation.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The UConnect™ phone book enables you to store up to
32 names and four numbers per name. Each language has
a separate 32-name phone book accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Blue-
tooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UCon-
nect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
Microphone Location
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the radio has the two control buttons that will
enable you to access the system. Actual button location
may vary with radio. The individual buttons are de-
scribed in the “Operations” section.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75
system can be adjusted either from the radio volume
control knob or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as ЉCELLЉ or caller ID on
certain radios.
3
Operations
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
UConnect Buttons
The UConnect™ system can be used with any Hands-
Free Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See
www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If
your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g.,
Headset Profile) you may not be able to use any UCon-
nect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the ЉReadyЉ prompt or another
prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ЉSetupЉ and then
ЉPhone Pairing,Љ the following compound command
can be said: ЉSetup Phone Pairing.Љ
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand ЉPhonebook New Entry,Љ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
ЉPhonebookЉ and ЉNew Entry.Љ Please remember, the
UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one
sitting eight feet away from you.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ЉCancelЉ and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.
Help Command
NOTE:
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ЉHelpЉ following
the beep. The UConnect™ system will play all the
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
•
•
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
www.dodge.com/uconnect
www.jeep.com/uconnect
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the ’Phone’ button on the radio control head.
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
•
•
•
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉSetup Phone Pairing.Љ
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ЉAdvanced Phone
ConnectivityЉ).
When prompted, after the beep, say ЉPair a PhoneЉ and
follow the audible prompts.
3
You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number,
which you will later need to enter into your cellular.
You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not
need to remember this pin number after the initial
pairing process.
Dial by Saying a Number
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉDial.Љ
•
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
•
System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
For example, you can say Љ234-567-8901.Љ The phone
number that you enter must be of valid length and
combination. Based on the country in which the ve-
hicle was purchased, the UConnect™ limits the user
from dialing invalid combination of numbers. For
example, in USA, 234-567-890 is nine digits long,
which is not a valid USA phone number - the closest
valid phone number has ten digits.
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone num-
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to phone book is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
Call by Saying a Name
•
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉPhonebook New Entry.Љ
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.Љ
•
•
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and it is
recommended. For example, say ЉRobert SmithЉ or
ЉRobertЉ instead of ЉBob.Љ
•
•
System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ЉJohn Doe,Љ where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phone
book. Refer to ЉAdd Names to Your UConnect™
Phonebook,Љ to learn how to store a name in the phone
book.
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
ЉHome,Љ ЉWork,Љ ЉMobile,Љ or ЉPagerЉ). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phone book
entry, if desired.
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phone book entry that you are adding.
•
The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phone book with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phone book accessible
only in that language.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phone book,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
ЉPhonebook EditЉ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the ЉPhonebook EditЉ feature.
3
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Editing names in the phone book is recom-
mended when vehicle is not in motion.
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉPhonebook Edit.Љ
NOTE: Editing phone book entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
•
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phone book
entry that you wish to edit.
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉPhonebook Delete.Љ
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phone book
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ЉList
NamesЉ to hear a list of the entries in the phone book
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phone book entry that you are editing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the ЉVoice RecognitionЉ button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say ЉDelete.Љ
•
Note that only the phone book in the current language
is deleted.
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
•
After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete, home,
work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉPhonebook List Names.Љ
•
•
The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phone book entries.
Note that only the phone book entry in the current
language is deleted.
To call one of the names in the list, press the ЉVoice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name, and say ЉCall.Љ
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
NOTE: The user can also exercise ЉEditЉ or ЉDeleteЉ
operations at this point.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉPhonebook Erase All.Љ
•
•
The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•
•
The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
The selected number will be dialed.
After confirmation, the phone book entries will be
deleted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
Phone Call Features
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call.
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system compatible phones in
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only either answer an incoming call or ignore it.
3
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ЉDialЉ or
ЉCallЉ followed by the phone number or phone book
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while
the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call,
refer to ЉToggling Between Calls.Љ To combine two calls,
refer to ЉConference Call.Љ
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press ’Phone’ button to accept the call. To reject the
call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the ЈPhone’ button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
ЈPhone’ button until you hear a single beep.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Toggling Between Calls
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the ‘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep.
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Redial
Conference Call
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉRedial.Љ
•
The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recogni-
tion’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under ЉMaking a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.Љ After the second call has
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
UConnect™ system.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ЈPhone’
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
•
After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change op-
eration, only the language specific 32-name phone book
is usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
and usable across all languages.
•
•
After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
3
Emergency Assistance
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
UConnect™ System Features
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉEmergencyЉ and the UConnect™ system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is only supported in the USA.
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-
528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
City in Mexico).
The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the cell phone directly.
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” cover-
age details in the Warranty information booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
UConnect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations when the cell phone has
network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™
system.
Paging
To learn how to page refer to ЉWorking with Automated
Systems.Љ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ЉWorking
with Automated Systems.Љ
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉTowing Assistance.Љ
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated tele-
phone system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voice-
mail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
aѧ,Љ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say ЉPair a PhoneЉ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™
system will not repeat a phone number before you dial
it).
3
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word ЉSend.Љ For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’
button and say Љ3 7 4 6 # Send.Љ Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by ЉSendЉ is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉSetup Confirmations.Љ The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming,
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing ЉWould you like to pair a phone, clear
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
•
Following the beep, say ЉMute.Љ
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
•
•
Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
Following the beep, say ЉMute-off.Љ
Information Service
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
number Љ#121,Љ you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
related information. This is an AT&T provided service.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send
the dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongo-
ing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say ЉTransfer Call.Љ
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
•
Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ЉconnectedЉ
with one electronic device at a time.
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “de-
lete” a paired phone.
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
3
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue-
tooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, then follow the
instruction described in your cellular phone user’s
manual.
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉSetup Select PhoneЉ and follow the prompts.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
•
You can also press the ЈVoice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
•
•
When prompted, say ЉList Phones.Љ
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UCon-
nect™ system will return to using the highest priority
phone present in or near (approximately within 30
feet) the vehicle.
The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the ЈVoice Recognition’
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
•
•
Press and hold the ‘Voice Recognition’ button for 5
seconds until the session begins, or,
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
Press the ‘Voice Recognition’ button and say ЉSetup,
Voice TrainingЉ command.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, say
ЉSetup Phone Pairing.Љ
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect™ system. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
•
•
At the next prompt, say ЉDeleteЉ and follow the
prompts.
You can also press the ЈVoice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone you wish to delete.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UCon-
nect™ system Voice Training feature may be used. To
enter this training mode, follow one of the two proce-
dures:
Voice Recognition (VR)
•
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
From outside the UConnect™ mode (e.g. from radio
mode)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
•
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
•
•
•
Storing names in phone book when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
Performance is maximized under:
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phone book.
•
•
•
•
•
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
low road noise,
3
UConnect™ phone book nametag recognition rate is
optimized for the person who stored the name in the
phone book.
smooth road surface,
•
•
You can say ЉOЉ (letter ЉOЉ) for Љ0Љ (zero). Љ800Љ must be
spoken Љeight-zero-zero.Љ
fully closed windows,
dry weather condition.
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
•
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
When navigating through an automated system, such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ЉSend.Љ
•
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
•
•
•
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
low road noise,
Bluetooth Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the UConnect™ system. When this happens, the connec-
tion can generally be re-established by switching the
phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain
in Bluetooth ЉonЉ mode.
smooth road surface,
fully closed windows, and
dry weather condition.
operation from driver seat.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must
wait at least five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
•
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect™ system.
Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
continue
delete
Primary
Alternate(s)
zero
dial
one
edit
two
three
four
five
six
seven
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Fancais
help
eight
home
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
add location
all
call
cancel
mute off
new entry
no
confirmation prompts
pager
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
General Information
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial
return to main menu
select phone
send
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
pairing
phone book
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
3
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
return or main menu
select
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
try again
voice training
work
yes
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster — If
Equipped
A lever style height adjustment feature enhances comfort
for petite as well as tall drivers. A lever with a ratcheting
mechanism, located on the outboard side of the seat,
raises and lowers it. Total travel is 2.2 in. (56 mm).
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
Forward/Rearward
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats, near the
floor. Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired
position.
Manual Seat Height Adjuster
Manual Seat Adjuster
After releasing the adjusting bar, apply forward and
rearward body pressure to be sure the seat is latched.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Reclining Bucket Seats
WARNING!
The recliner control is on the side of the seat. To recline,
lean forward slightly before lifting the lever, then lean
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position.
•
•
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be properly adjusted and you could be
injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is
parked.
3
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Seat Back Fold Forward
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
Power Seats — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. The control lever is located
on the outboard side of the driver’s seatback. Turn the
control lever downward to increase and upward to
decrease the desired amount of lumbar support.
The power seat switches are on the outboard side of the
seat near the floor. Use the front switch to move the seat
up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat. The rear
switch controls the seatback recliner.
Power Seat Switches
Lumbar Support
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
This feature heats leather or cloth front driver and
passenger seats. The controls for the heated seats are
located in the center console above the climate controls.
There are indicator lights in the switches, which indicate
a low heat setting (one lamp lit) or high heat setting (2
lamps lit).
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat as it may
cause damage to the seat controls.
3
Heated Seats — If Equipped
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
Heated Seat Switches
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat
The recline handle on the front passenger seat also
releases the seatback to fold forward.
The hard seatback features a work surface and a molded
rim for retaining items stored on the seat back panel.
Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat
Seat Back Fold Forward
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Adjustable Head Restraints
Folding Rear Seat
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Adjust the restraints so
that the upper edge is as high as practical. To raise, pull
up on the head restraint. To lower, depress the button on
the post guide and push down on the head restraint.
To provide additional storage area, the rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull on the loops shown in the picture
to fold down either or both seatbacks.
When returning the rear seat back to the upright position,
be sure the seat back is latched.
3
Adjustable Head Restraint
Folding Rear Seats
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest
The rear seat is equipped with a folding armrest with cup
holders.
WARNING!
The rear cargo area of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position)
should not be used as a play area by children. They
could be seriously injured in an accident. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
Folding Rear Seat Armrest
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
Then lift the secondary latch located under the front edge
of the hood, near the center and raise the hood.
3
Hood Safety Catch
Hood Release Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole
on the left underside of the hood.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
LIGHTS
Map/Reading/Interior Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above
the rear view mirror. Each light is turned ON by pressing
the button. Press the button a second time to turn the
light OFF. The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle. They will not turn off
automatically. Interior lighting also comes on when a
door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fully
upward, past the second detent.
Hood Prop Rod Hole Location
Before closing the hood, make sure to stow the prop rod
in its proper location. To prevent possible damage, do not
slam the hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at
the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
There is a second light located midway back in the
headliner.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open. This includes the glove box light,
but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation,
either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light
switch.
Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights
Turn the end of the Multi-Function Control Lever to the
first detent for parking light operation. Turn to the
second detent for headlight operation. Turn to the third
detent “A” for “Auto” headlight operation (if equipped).
3
Multi-Function Control Lever
The Multi-Function Control Lever controls the operation
of the headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight
beam selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior
lights, the passing lights, and fog lights. The lever is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Headlight Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the center portion of the Multi-Function Control
Lever up or down.
Headlight Time Delay
There is also a feature that delays turning off the vehicle
lights for 30, 60, or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned OFF. To activate the headlight delay, the multi-
function control lever must be rotated to the “Off”
position after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Only the
headlights will illuminate during this time. Refer to
“EVIC- Customer Programmable Features” in Section 4
to turn this feature “On/Off” or set the time interval.
Passing Light / Flash to Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the Multi-Function Control Lever toward
you. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high
beam and remain on until the lever is released.
Dimmer Control
NOTE: If the Multi-Function Control Lever is held in
the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds, the
high beams will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds
for the next flash to pass operation.
Automatic Headlight System — If Equipped
Turning the end of the multi-function control lever to the
third detent, “A” (Auto), will activate the automatic
headlight system.
With the engine running and the multi-function control
lever in the “A” (Auto) position, the headlights will turn
on and off based on the surrounding light levels.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Running
Lights (DRL) at DRL intensity (lower), whenever the
ignition is on, the engine is running, the headlight switch
is off, the parking brake is off, the turn signal is off, and
the gearshift lever is in any position except park.
3
NOTE: On this vehicle, the daytime running light will
automatically turn off when the turn signal is in opera-
tion and automatically turn back on when the turn signal
is not operating.
Lights On Reminder
Front Fog Light Control
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
NOTE: The front fog lights will only operate with the
headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights
will turn off the front fog lights.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is on the Multi-Function
Control Lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights
and pull out the end of the control lever.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is
defective.
Move the Multi-Function Control Lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.
Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
Push the Multi-Function Control Lever away from you to
switch the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever
toward you, to switch the headlights back to Low beam.
Turn Signal Control
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
Highbeam Functions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
on the control lever. The lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the multi-function control lever
toward you and hold while spray is desired. If the lever
is pulled while in the delay range, the wiper will operate
in low speed for two wipe cycles after the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent interval pre-
viously selected.
3
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers
will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn OFF.
NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to
the OFF position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned OFF and the blades cannot return to the OFF
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Windshield Wiper / Washer Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mist Feature
WARNING!
Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single
wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
wipers will continue to operate.
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during wind-
shield washer use.
Mist Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Windshield Wiper Operation
Turn to the second detent for low wiper speed and the
third detent for high wiper speed.
delay time. The delay can be regulated from a maximum
of approximately 18 seconds between cycles, to a cycle
every second.
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
3
NOTE: If the front wiper is operating when the ignition
is turned off, the wiper will automatically return to the
ЉParkЉ position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wipers
will resume operation.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers is located
in the engine compartment and should be checked for
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water. Refer to the appropriate engine diagram
(Section 7 “Maintaining Your Vehicle”) for the location of
the reservoir.
Wiper Control
Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-
tween cycles, desirable. Select the delay interval by
turning the end of the lever. Rotate the knob upward to
decrease the delay time and downward to increase the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle inward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The
telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or
driving without the telescoping adjustment locked
could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Tilt / Telescoping Steering Wheel Lock
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
outward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). The
speed control lever is located on the right side of the
steering wheel.
OFF, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The
CRUISE indicator will turn off. The system should be
turned OFF when not in use.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control System will auto-
matically turn itself off when the ignition key is turned to
the “OFF” position.
3
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set At A Desired Speed:
Speed Control Location
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Activate:
Push the ON/OFF button located in the end of the
Electronic Speed Control Lever. The CRUISE indicator in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
NOTE:
•
The vehicle must be traveling at least 25 mph (40
km/h) for the speed control to set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and
on level ground before pressing the SET lever.
Tapping “RESUME ACCEL” once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will
increase speed by 3 mph (5 km/h), etc.
To Deactivate:
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the speed control
lever towards you “CANCEL”, or normal brake pressure
while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed control
without erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the
ON/OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases
the set speed memory.
To decrease speed while speed control is ON, push down
and hold “SET DECEL”. Release the lever when the
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
Tapping the “SET DECEL” button once will result in a 1
mph (2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is
tapped, speed decreases.
To Resume Speed:
To resume a previously set speed, push the “RESUME
ACCEL” lever up and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
To Vary The Speed Setting:
When the speed control is ON, speed can be increased by
pushing up and holding “RESUME ACCEL”. Release the
lever when the desired speed is reached, and the new
speed will be set.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
To Accelerate For Passing:
For additional information on HomeLink, call 1–800–
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
Using Speed Control On Hills
3
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HomeLinkா) — IF
EQUIPPED
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that oper-
ate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
are needed.
The three buttons for your garage door opener will be
located in the driver’s sunvisor. The training procedure is
the same regardless of the 3-button location.
Programming The Universal Transceiver
(HomeLinkா)
NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is
advised to park outside the garage and with the engine
off. It is also recommended that you install a new battery
NOTE: The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is dis-
abled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
in the hand-held transmitter of the device being pro-
grammed. This will allow for quicker training and accu-
rate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
If your garage door opener (located in the garage) is
equipped with an antenna, make sure that the antenna is
hanging straight down.
1. Erase the factory test codes by pressing the two
outside buttons. Release the buttons when the light in the
Universal Transceiver begins to flash (about 20 seconds).
NOTE: Step 1 above does not have to be followed to
program additional hand held transmitters.
Proper Transceiver Training Distance
2. Choose one of the three Universal Transceiver buttons
to program. Position the end of your hand-held transmit-
ter 1-3 inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons
while keeping its indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold the HomeLink button
(that you want to train) and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4 is
complete.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with
procedures noted under ЉGate Operator/Canadian Pro-
gramming.Љ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
4. The indicator light in the Universal Transceiver will
begin to flash, first slowly and then rapidly. The rapid
flashing indicates successful programming. If after 90
seconds the indicator light does not flash rapidly or goes
out, return to step 1 and repeat the procedure. To train the
other buttons, repeat steps 3 and 4. Be sure to keep your
hand held transmitters in case you need to retrain the
Universal Transceiver.
Programming A “Rolling Code” System
On garage door openers with the “Rolling Code” feature,
the transmitter code changes after each use to prevent the
copying of your code.
NOTE: The assistance of a second person may make the
following programming procedure quicker and easier.
3
1. Locate the training button on the garage door motor
head unit. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by garage door opener manufacturer. If you have
difficulty in locating the training button, check your
garage door opener manual, or call 1-800-355-3515 or, on
the Internet, at www.homelink.com.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink but-
tons, begin with ЉProgrammingЉ Step Two. Do not repeat
Step One.
NOTE: If your garage door opener fails to respond to
the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver, and
your garage door opener is manufactured after 1995, it
may have a multiple security code system (rolling code
system). If your garage door opener is the “rolling code”
type, please proceed to the heading “Programming A
Rolling Code System.”
2. Press and hold the training button on the garage door
opener head unit. This will activate the “training” light.
NOTE: After completing step 2, you have 30 seconds to
start step 3.
3. Return to the Universal Transceiver in the vehicle and
firmly press and release the garage door button. Press
and release the button a second time to complete the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
training process. Some garage door openers may require
you to do this procedure a third time to complete the
training.
NOTE: When programming such a garage door opener
or gate, unplug the device to prevent possible damage to
the garage door or gate motor.
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Using HomeLink
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to Љtime-outЉ (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to Љtime-outЉ in the same manner.
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.). The light in the display shows that the signal is
being transmitted. For convenience, the hand-held trans-
mitter of the device may also be used at any time.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
programming a gate operator by using the ЉProgram-
mingЉ procedures (regardless of where you live), replace
؆Programming HomeLink؆ Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release your hand-held transmitter
every two seconds until the frequency signal is accepted
successfully by HomeLink. The Universal Transceiver
light will flash slowly and then rapidly when the pro-
gramming is successful. Proceed with ؆Programming
HomeLink؆ Step 4 to complete the procedure.
Erasing HomeLink Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual
buttons cannot be erased but can be ЉreprogrammedЉ -
note below), follow the step noted:
Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons (for
approximately 20 seconds). Release the buttons when the
indicator begins to flash rapidly. All three channels will
be cleared.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button
To program device with previously trained
HomeLink button, follow these steps:
begin to flash rapidly, release both buttons.
a
a
Security
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies
by following the “Erasing HomeLink Buttons” instruc-
tions in this section.
1. Press and hold the Universal Transceiver button to be
reprogrammed. Do not release until step 4 has been
completed.
3
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after
20 seconds), position the hand held transmitter one to
three inches away from the button to be trained.
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
3. Press and hold the hand held transmitter button.
This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
4. The Universal Transceiver indicator light will begin to
flash, first slowly, then rapidly. When the indicator lights
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HomeLink is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
WARNING!
•
A moving garage door can cause injury to people
and pets in the path of the door. People or pets
could be seriously or fatally injured. Only use this
transceiver with a garage door opener that has a
“stop and reverse” feature as required by federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features, it could cause injury or death. Call toll-
free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.homelink.com for safety information or as-
sistance.
In the event that you are still having programming
difficulties, questions, or comments, call toll free 1–800–
355–3515 or if you have access on the Internet, at
www.homelink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
damage to objects.
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The sunroof controls are mounted between the sun visors
in the Dome / Reading Lamp.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
3
•
•
In an accident, there is greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Power Sunroof Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof - Manual
Closing Sunroof - Express
Press the switch rearward and hold, and the sunroof will
open automatically from any position. The sunroof will
open fully, then stop automatically. During this opera-
tion, any release of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully, then stop automatically. This is called
Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof - Express
Auto Sunroof (Express) with Anti–Pinch
Protection — If Equipped
During express closing, anytime an obstacle that restricts
glass movement is detected, the motor will stop and
reverse travel to avoid pinching the object.
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called
Express Open. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
WARNING!
Closing Sunroof - Manual
To Close the sunroof from an open or vent position, press
and hold the switch forward. The sunroof will close fully
and stop automatically. Release the switch to stop sun-
roof travel at any point.
There is no anti-pinch protection when the sunroof
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury, be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the sunroof path before closing.
Venting Sunroof - Express
Press and release the ЉVЉ button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Sunshade Operation
Ignition Off Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch
is turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
3
Wind Buffeting
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. For
details, refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories Until
Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Program-
mable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if so equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12-volt electrical outlets on this vehicle.
Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse.
The 12-volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray (if
equipped with an optional Smoker’s Package) has power
available only when the ignition is on. This outlet will
also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit.
NOTE: If desired, the power outlet next to the ash
receiver tray (if equipped) can be converted by your
authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition
switch in the LOCK position.
Instrument Panel Power Outlet
The center console outlet is powered directly from the
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent
engine starting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the inverter
will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
3
To Avoid Serious Injury or Death:
•
•
•
•
•
Do not use a 3-Prong Adaptor.
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
Console Interior
ELECTRICAL POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 VAC (150-Watts
Maximum) outlet in the cen-
ter console for added conve-
nience. This outlet can power
cell phones, electronics, and
other low power devices.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER
The covered ash receiver is located in the instrument
panel below the climate control knobs.
CAUTION!
The cigar lighter is located to the right of the ash receiver.
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
As a child safety precaution, the lighter only operates
with the ignition switch ON. It heats when pushed in and
pops out automatically when ready for use. To preserve
the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the
heating position.
Cup Holder Ash Receiver — If Equipped
•
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
Should your vehicle not come equipped with the instru-
ment panel cigar lighter and ash receiver, an optional ash
receiver is available from your authorized dealer and will
fit in either one of the center console cup holders.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with the heated and
cooled cup holder, locate the cup holder ash receiver
in the forward cup holder.
3
The optional ash receiver also comes with a cigar lighter.
You may use the power outlet, located in the instrument
panel below the climate control knob, or in the bottom of
the console compartment, for this cigar lighter.
Optional Cup Holder Ash Receiver
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONSOLE FEATURES
Dual Storage Bins
Lifting a latch at the front of the hinged armrest provides
access to these storage areas.
Console Features
The center console armrest slides forward from design
position to provide added user comfort. Two cup holders,
each of which can accommodate large sized fast food
beverage containers. A one piece cup holder insert for
both cavities can easily be removed for cleaning. The cup
holders will also accommodate large size cups and 20 oz.
bottles. (An optional removable ashtray may be located
in the one cup holder.)
1 — Release button for top compartment
2 — Release button for bottom compartment
3 — Top Compartment
4 — Bottom Compartment
•
The Left Latch opens to the top storage area.
Console Features
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
•
The lower bin can be accessed directly, without first
exposing the upper bin, by operating the right latch
with the armrest down.
Video Console — If Equipped
The optional VES™(Video Entertainment System) in-
cludes the following components:
•
•
The first storage bin can be used to hold smaller items.
•
The screen for a rear seat DVD player is stored under
the armrest.
3
The lower storage bin includes a molded-in coin
holder, room for CD’s, DVD’s, and a power outlet that
allows a cell phone to recharge while concealed.
•
•
Remote Control
Audio / Video RCA Jacks
NOTE: A notch in the side of the console base under the
armrest will also allow use of cell phone while still
plugged into the power outlet and with the armrest
latched down.
NOTE: The power outlet located inside the console can
also energize the cigar lighter in the available Smoker’s
Package.
Video Console
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUP HOLDERS
Heated or Cooled Cup Holder — If Equipped
With this feature the rear cavity of the cup holder can
heat or cool the beverage container it is holding. The rear
cup holder can heat from room temperature (70°F /21°C),
to 140°F (60°C) or cool it to near freezing, 0°F (–20°C).
The switch is located on the front of the center console
and has three positions: HEAT, OFF, COOL.
When the unit is on and the LED is Red, the cup holder
is being heated. When the LED is Blue, the cup holder is
being cooled.
Cooled or Heated Cup Holder
A special mug is included with this feature and is
specially designed to work best with this system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Rear Bottle Holders
There are built-in bottle holders located in both rear door
trim panels.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed,
burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the
doors to avoid injury.
3
Rear Bottle Holder
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
1. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining
in the fuel tank.
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is
on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and
the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
2. Fuel Door Reminder
4
This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is
located on the left side of the vehicle.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading below the red area of
the gauge shows that the engine cooling system
is operating properly. The gauge pointer may show a
higher than normal temperature when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, in heavy stop and go
traffic, or when towing a trailer.
4. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
5. Tachometer
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (rpm x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Low Fuel Light
9. Theft Alarm Light — If Equipped
When the fuel level drops to 2 gallons, the fuel
symbol will light and a single chime will sound.
This light will flash rapidly for several seconds when the
alarm system is arming. The light will begin to flash
slowly indicating that the system is armed.
7. Charging System Light
10. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light shows the status of the electrical
charging system. The light should come on
briefly when the ignition is first turned on and remain
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or
comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s
electrical devices, such as the Fog Lights or Rear
Defroster. If the Charging System Light remains on, it
means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with
the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDI-
ATELY. See your local authorized dealer.
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will come on for about six seconds. A
chime will sound if you have not pulled the
shoulder belt out of the retractor. This is a reminder to
“buckle up”. If you do not buckle up, the light will
remain on.
11. Oil Pressure Light
Shows low engine oil pressure. The light will
come on and remain on when the ignition
switch is turned from the OFF to the ON position, and
the light will turn off after the engine is started. If the
bulb does not come on during starting, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
8. Airbag Light
The light comes on and remains on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light does
not come on during starting, stays on, or
comes on while driving, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE
THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine.
This can be determined using the procedure shown in
Section 7.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
12. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine con-
dition. If the engine is critically hot, a warning
chime will sound 10 times. After the chime
turns off, the engine will still be critically hot until the
light goes out.
4
13. Transmission Range Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transaxle gear
selection.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is
not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System low
tire pressure telltale.
14. Tire Pressure Monitor Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more tire pressures is low. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
off for 60 seconds when a system fault is detected. The
flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault
condition is removed and reset.
15. Odometer/Trip Odometer
A vacuum fluorescent display indicates the total distance
the vehicle has been driven. Also, the cluster odometer
will display the following vehicle warning messages:
door/trunk ajar and loose gas cap.
If this indicator comes on, the entire, PRNDL/ odometer,
display will brighten to FULL DAYTIME INTENSITY
and will not be dimmable.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged,
“FUEL CAP OFF” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster odometer. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and
press the odometer reset button to turn the “FUEL CAP
OFF” message off.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with the optional Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instru-
ment cluster, all warnings including “DOOR AJAR”, and
“TRUNK AJAR” will only be displayed in the EVIC
display. For additional information, refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center — If Equipped” in Section 3.
The two (if equipped) trip odometers show individual
trip mileage. To switch from odometer to trip odometers,
press and release the Trip Odometer button. To reset a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
trip odometer, display the desired trip odometer to be
reset then push and hold the button until the display
resets (approximately 2 seconds).
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There-
fore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
If the Malfunction Indicator Light flashes when the
engine is running, serious conditions may exist that
could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
4
If this indicator comes on, the entire, PRNDL/ odometer,
display will brighten to FULL DAYTIME INTENSITY
and will not be dimmable.
16. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic
system called OBD that monitors emissions,
engine, and automatic transaxle control sys-
tems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the
ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does
not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
17. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the Speed Control
System is ON.
18. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Knob
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings. Trip A or Trip B
(if equipped) will appear when in the trip odometer
mode. Push in and hold the button for two seconds to
reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers. The
odometer must be in trip mode to reset.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
19. Electronic Throttle Control Indicator Light
This red illuminated light informs you of a
problem with the Electronic Throttle Control
system. If a problem is detected, the light
will come on while the engine is running. If
the light remains lit with the engine running your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
however see your dealer for service as soon as pos-
sible.
20. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
— If Equipped
If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt
your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions, and do not switch off the ESP, or TCS
— if equipped.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running you
may experience power loss, an elevated/rough idle, and
increased brake pedal effort, and your vehicle may
require towing. Immediate service is required.
21. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior
turn signal, when using the turn signal lever.
22. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light shows when the front fog lights are
ON.
The light will come on when the ignition switch is first
turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check. This is
normal. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
23. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
Light
The malfunction lamp for the ESP is com-
bined with BAS. The yellow “ESP/BAS
Warning Lamp” comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. They
should go out with the engine running. If the “ESP/
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
BAS Warning Lamp” comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected in
either the ESP or the BAS system. If this light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has
been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30
mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
The warning light should be checked frequently to assure
that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key to the
on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light should
come on. If the light does not come on, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
25. High Beam Indicator
This light shows that the headlights are on high
beam. Push the turn signal lever away from the
steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or
low beam.
4
24. Anti-Lock Warning Light (ABS) — If Equipped
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS) described elsewhere in this
manual. This light will come on when the
ignition key is turned to the ON position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
26. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking
brake application. If the brake light turns on,
it may indicate that the parking brake is
applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there
is a problem with the anti-lock brake system (if
equipped).
If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving,
it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required, however,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not
on.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock
Brakes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair
to the ABS system is required.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
WARNING!
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
27. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display—Premium Cluster Only
This window will display EVIC information.
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) – IF EQUIPPED
•
•
•
•
Compass heading (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW)
Outside temperature display (°F or °C)
Trip computer functions
UConnect™ hands-free communication system dis-
plays (if equipped)
4
•
Audio mode display – 12 preset Radio Stations or CD
Title and Track number when playing
•
•
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) (if equipped)
Navigation system screens (if equipped)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
EVIC Display Location
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages.
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display. It is located in the lower
left part of the cluster below the fuel and engine tem-
perature gauge. The EVIC consists of the following:
•
•
•
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
•
•
System Status
Vehicle information warning message displays
Personal Settings (customer programmable features)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
•
•
•
Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
•
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
RKE (Remote Keyless Entry) Battery Low (with a
single chime)
Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
•
•
•
Memory #1/#2 Profile Set
•
•
•
•
Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
Headlights On
Memory #1/#2 Profile Recall
Memory System Disabled – Vehicle Not In Park (with
a single chime)
•
•
Memory System Disabled – Seat Belt Buckled (with a
single chime)
Key In Ignition
EVIC Functions
Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park.
The 2nd (MENU / STEP) and 3rd (RESET) buttons of the
center instrument panel switch bank are used for EVIC
Functions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
•
•
•
Distance To Empty
Elapsed Time
Display Units of Measure in
Press the STEP button to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
4
The Trip Functions mode displays the following information:
•
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read,
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
Trip Functions
MENU / STEP Button
Press and release the MENU / STEP button
(located near the radio) until one of the follow-
ing Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the RESET
button.
•
Average Fuel Economy
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
To Reset The Display
Pressing and holding the RESET button once
will clear the function currently being dis-
played. Reset will only occur if a resettable
function is currently being displayed. To reset
all resettable functions, press and release the
RESET button a second time within 3 seconds
•
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will
change to a text display of ЉLOW FUEL.Љ This display
will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding
a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off
the ЉLOW FUELЉ text and a new DTE value will
display.
RESET
Button
of resetting the currently displayed function (Reset ALL
will be displayed during this 3-second window).
Compass Display
•
Elapsed Time
COMPASS Button
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
compass button to display one of eight com-
pass readings and the outside temperature. The
RESET button is used in conjunction with the MENU /
STEP buttons to navigate and select Menu Preferences.
•
Display Units of Measure in:
To make your selection, press and release the RESET
button until “US” or “METRIC” appears.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, eliminating the need to
calibrate the compass manually. When the vehicle is new,
the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “FLASH THE CAL” indicator until the compass
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
is calibrated. Calibrate the compass by completing one or
more 360° turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the “FLASH THE CAL” message
displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass will now
function normally.
4. Drive the vehicle slowly, completing one or more
circles (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the “CAL” message turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
Compass Variance
Manual Compass Calibration
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set
using the following procedure:
If the compass appears erratic, inaccurate, or abnormal,
you may wish to calibrate the compass manually. Prior to
calibrating the compass, make sure the proper zone is
selected. Continue to calibrate the compass manually
using the following steps:
4
1. Start the engine and leave the transmission selector in
PARK, in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.
NOTE: Magnetic materials and cell phones should be
kept away from the top of the Instrument Panel. This is
where the compass sensor is located.
2. Press the Step Button Several Times until “Personal
Settings” is displayed in the EVIC window.
3. Once in “Personal Settings,” Press the STEP button
until “Calibrate Compass Yes” displays in the EVIC
window. Press and release the RESET Button and the
“CAL” indicator will come on solid.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Procedure to Update the Variance:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position while
leaving the transmission selector in PARK.
2. Press the Step Button Several Times until “Personal
Settings” is displayed in the EVIC window.
3. Once in “Personal Settings,” Press the STEP button
until “Compass Variance” and the current value displays
in the EVIC window.
4. Press and release the RESET Button to increment the
Variance Value by one, (one button press per update),
until the proper variance zone is selected according to the
map.
NOTE: The Variance values will wrap around from 15
back to 1. The Default Variance is Zone 8.
5. Press and release the RESET button to exit. Press the
STEP button if you wish to calibrate the compass manu-
ally (see: “Manual Compass Calibration” listed above).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
Telephone — If Equipped
Press and release the MENU button until “Telephone”
displays in the EVIC.
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the
signal strength of the UConnect™ phone. The
number of horizontal bars increases as the
strength of the UConnect™ phone signal in-
creases.
Signal
Strength
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC pro-
vides the following telephone information:
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate an
incoming call.
•
Phone status: idle; voice mail; roaming; battery
strength; and signal strength in increments of 20
percent.
4
Incom-
•
Call status: Incoming call; connecting; connected; air
time in minutes and seconds; call ended; call failed;
roaming; and no phone connection.
ing Call
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the UConnect™ phone is currently in analog
mode.
•
•
UConnect Active.
Analog
Caller ID phone number display.
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the UConnect™ phone is currently roaming.
When the appropriate conditions exist, and if supported
by the cell phone, the EVIC will display the following
telephone symbols:
Roam-
ing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
you have voice mail.
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the UConnect™ phone is currently not avail-
able.
Voice
Mail
Phone
Not
Avail-
able
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate a
text message.
Navigation — If Equipped
Text
Message
Navigation Display Control
Press and release the MENU button until Navigation
displays in the EVIC. When the Navigation System is On,
the buttons can be used to select the Map or Menu
display on the Navigation Unit. When the Menu display
is active, the STEP button can be used to scroll through
the list, the RESET button can be used to select an item,
and the AUDIO MODE button can be used to return to
the previous menu. When the Map display is active,
pressing the RESET button will change the Navigation
Unit Display to the Menu.
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the
battery strength of the UConnect™ phone.
Battery
Strength
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
a phone connection has been made.
Call in
Progress
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
Turn-By-Turn Directions
Pressing the RESET button while in this display selects
English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, or Dutch de-
pending on availability. As you continue, the displayed
information will be shown in the selected language.
The EVIC displays turn-by-turn directions to a pro-
grammed destination when Turn-By-Turn Navigation is
enabled through Personal Settings. When enabled, the
EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the
top of the screen, followed by an arrow to indicate the
direction to turn the vehicle, and a count down to
indicate the distance to the turn.
NOTE: UConnect™ language will not change using the
EVIC. Please refer to “Language Selection” in the
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) sec-
tion of this manual for details.
4
NOTE: Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
detailed operating instructions.
Auto Door Locks
When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
To make your selection, press and hold the RESET button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)
This allows the driver to set and recall features when the
automatic transaxle is in PARK.
Auto Unlock on Exit
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set-
tings displays in the EVIC.
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park)
or N (Neutral) position and the driver’s door is opened.
To make your selection, press and hold the RESET button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Use the STEP button to display one of the following
choices:
Language
When in this display you may select different languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Remote Key Unlock Driver Door 1st
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press and release the
RESET button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless
entry unlock button. When Driver Door 1st Press is
selected, you must press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will
unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button. To make your selection, press and release
the RESET button until “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All
Doors 1st Press” appears.
Headlights Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and hold the RESET button until “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90”
appears.
Headlights With Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
Sound Horn with Lock
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press and hold the RESET button until “ON” or
“OFF” appears.
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is pressed. This
feature may be selected with or without the flash lights
on lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the RESET button until “ON” or “OFF”
appears.
Flash Lights Lock
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3 of this manual.
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
Key-Off Power Display
Display Units of Measure in English or Metric
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the RESET button until “US” or “METRIC” ap-
pears.
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), power
sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain
active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned off. Opening a vehicle door will cancel this
feature. To make your selection, press and hold the
RESET button until “Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” or “10
min.” appears.
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock at the
top center of the instrument
panel, press and hold the but-
ton until the setting is correct.
The clock will adjust slowly at
first and then quicker the
longer the button is held.
4
Illumination Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To
make your selection, press and hold the RESET button
until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
Confirmation of Voice Commands — If Equipped
When ON is selected, all voice commands from the
UConnect™ system are confirmed. To make your selec-
tion, press and hold the RESET button until “ON” or
“OFF” appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the frequency and/or
time in hours and minutes (depending on your radio
model) whenever the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait approximately
5 seconds.
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position, or
when the radio frequency is being displayed, time keep-
ing is accurately maintained.
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-
eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “ap-
parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio sig-
nals.
On the AM/FM/CD (6-disc) radio the time button alter-
nates the location of the time and frequency on the
display. On the AM/FM/CD (single-disc) radio only one
of the two, time or frequency is displayed.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
Two Types of Signals
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Audio control.
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
/ Audio control to set the minutes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
Electrical Disturbances
SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
JACK)
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower
right side of your radio faceplate.
AM Reception
4
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia-
tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if
equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped)
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.
REQ Radio
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Electronic Volume Control
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will be
displayed. In AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button
will switch between the time and frequency displays.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons (Radio Mode)
Clock Setting Procedure
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE
control knob.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
TUNE control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will
display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Bass tones.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control
knob. Press the TUNE control knob to save time change.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and
MID will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
4
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at step
2.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and
TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and
BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to
the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or
left side speakers.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind or fast forward button causes the
tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of
the arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or
Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and
FADE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
left or right to adjust the sound level between the front
and rear speakers.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting
tone, balance and fade.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MUSIC TYPE Button (Radio Mode)
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for 5 seconds. Pressing the Music Type button or
turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will
allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio
stations do not currently broadcast Music Type informa-
tion.
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
R & B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Toggle the Music Type button to select the following
format types:
16 Digit-Character Dis-
Program Type
Soft
Soft
play
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
No program type or un-
None
defined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Talk
Top 40
Weather
Country
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
Jazz
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
•
•
•
Subtitle – Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (If Equipped).
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
Audio Stream – Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (If Equipped).
4
NOTE: Use Tune Control Knob to scroll through the
entries, and push Audio/Select button to select an entry
and make changes.
Angle – Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if it is supported by the DVD disc
(If Equipped).
•
•
DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (If Equipped).
NOTE: The available selections for each of the above
entries varies depending upon the disc.
NOTE: These selections can only be made while play-
ing a DVD.
•
DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD or pausing the DVD, by
pushing the SELECT button (If Equipped).
•
•
•
VES Power - Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF (If
Equipped).
VES Lock - Locks out rear VES remote controls (If
Equipped).
DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
VES CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change mode of
either the IR1 or IR2, wireless headphones, by pressing
the Audio/Select button (If Equipped).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button will
allow user to set the clock. Turn TUNE control knob to
adjust the hours then press and turn the TUNE control
knob to adjust the minutes. Press the TUNE control
knob again to save changes.
then scroll down and select Љother.Љ Enter the country
code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down
to select the # and then push to select.
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default
subtitle language (effective only if language supported
by disc). If customer wishes to select a language not
listed, then scroll down and select Љother.Љ Enter the
country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up
and down to select the # and then push to select.
•
Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items, and set
defaults according to customer preference.
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If customer wishes to select
a language not listed, then scroll down and select Љother.Љ
Enter the 4 digit country code using the TUNE control
knob to scroll up and down to select the # and then push
to select.
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between
subtitle OFF or ON.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to limit maximum
audio dynamic range - The default is set to ЉHighЉ and
under this setting, dialogues are played at 11 db higher
than if the setting is ЉNormal.Љ
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default
audio language (effective only if language supported by
disc). If customer wishes to select a language not listed,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between
wide screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to ON and a DVD video is inserted, it
will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play
the movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto play the main title. In such cases, use the menu
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,12 FM and
12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into push-
button memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can
be selected by pressing the push-button twice.
4
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the cus-
tomer preferred settings.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
AM and FM Buttons (Radio Mode)
Press buttons to select AM or FM Modes.
Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
SET Button (Radio Mode) — To Set the
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DISC Button
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
Press the LOAD button and the push-button with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
ЉINSERT DISC,Љ insert the CD into the player.
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to a authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum total of 5 times.
Radio display will show ЉLOADING DISCЉ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the eject button and the push-button with
the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD
was loaded and the disc will unload and move
to the entrance for easy removal. Radio display
will show ЉEJECTING DISCЉ when the disc is being
ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
4
Press and hold the eject button for 5 seconds and all CDs
will be ejected from the radio.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
RND Button (Random Play Button) (CD MODE)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD,
MP3/MWA modes.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
The radio can play MP3/WMA files, however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
•
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a
3-character extension)
Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a
3-character extension)
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as Љkeep
disc open after writingЉ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
If a disc contain multi formats, such as CD audio and
mp3/wma tracks, the radio will only play the mp3/wma
tracks on that disc.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play-
back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
•
•
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 8
Maximum number of files: 255
Maximum number of folders: 100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit rate (kbps)
4
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
•
•
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
24, 22.05, 16
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
WMA
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
WMA
44.1 and 48
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE control knob. Selecting a folder by
pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the
files contained in that folder (or the next folder in
sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
The folder list will time out after 5 seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
Press the INFO button once more to return to Љelapsed
timeЉ priority mode.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more
and radio will display song titles for each file.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to
return to Љelapsed timeЉ display.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES)
Guide.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed
playing time to time of day. The time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
Dolby
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories.
ЉDolbyЉ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
4
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Macrovision
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
This product incorporates copyright protection tech-
nology that is protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright
protection technology must be authorized by Macro-
vision, and is intended for home and other limited
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited
No function.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
DTS
ЉDTSЉ and ЉDTS 2.0Љ are trademarks of Digital Theater
Systems, Inc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn the radio
on. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time
to turn the radio off.
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower
right side of your radio faceplate.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
RES Radio
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
SCAN Button
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
TUNE control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in either AM or FM frequen-
cies, pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station
before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press
SCAN a second time.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control
knob. Press the TUNE control knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
INFO Button
4
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button,
and selecting SET CLOCK. Once in this display follow
the above procedure, starting at step 2.
TIME Button
RW/FF
Press the TIME button and the time of day will be
displayed. In AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button
will switch between the time and frequency displays.
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Clock Setting Procedure
TUNE Control
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE
control knob.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
MUSIC TYPE Button
Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will
display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Bass tones.
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for 5 seconds. Pressing the Music Type button or
turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will
allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio
stations do not currently broadcast Music Type informa-
tion.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and
MID will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Toggle the Music Type button to select the following
format types:
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and
TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones.
16 Digit-Character Dis-
Program Type
play
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and
BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to
the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or
left side speakers.
No program type or un-
None
defined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and
FADE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
left or right to adjust the sound level between the front
and rear speakers.
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting
tone, balance and fade.
Jazz
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
R & B
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
user to set the clock. Turn TUNE control knob to adjust
the hours then press and turn the TUNE control knob
to adjust the minutes. Press the TUNE control knob
again to save changes.
4
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
AM and FM Buttons
Press buttons to select AM or FM Modes.
SET Button — To Set the Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM
stations to be stored into push-button memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the push-button twice.
Operation Instructions - CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: This Radio is capable of playing compact discs
(CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable com-
pact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
an inch, a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected
before a new disc can be loaded.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM and 12 FM
stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
CAUTION!
NOTE: Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
•
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD,
MP3 modes.
•
•
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
4
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
Dual—media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and can
cause damage to the player.
SCAN Button
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
RW/FF
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of
the current CD track/title.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
AM or FM Button
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
•
•
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Maximum number of files: 255
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Maximum number of folders (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
•
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a
3-character extension)
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a
3-character extension)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as Љkeep disc open after
writingЉ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
48, 44.1, 32
4
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3 Files
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE control knob. Selecting a folder by
pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the
files contained in that folder (or the next folder in
sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
The folder list will time out after 5 seconds.
•
•
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to Љelapsed
timeЉ priority mode.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more
and radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to
return to Љelapsed timeЉ display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES) (If Equipped)
Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES)
Guide.
4
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
SALES CODE RER — AM/FM/CD/DVD RADIO
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower
right side of your radio faceplate.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds (when
ignition is off).
Capability (RER)
-
combines
a
Global-Positioning
System-based navigation system with an integrated color
screen to provide maps, turn identification, selection
menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destina-
tions and routes.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This radio has a hard drive. CD’s can be ripped to the
hard drive, and the map data comes loaded on the hard
drive. Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
detailed operating instructions.
either the H button on the faceplate to change the hour or
the M button on the faceplate to change the minute.
2. The time setting will increase each time you press the
button. Holding either button in will fast forward the
setting.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
3. If no changes are made within 5 seconds of accessing
the Setup screen, the screen will time out and you will be
taken to the last mode.
Clock Setting Procedure
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the sys-
tem’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone
and daylight savings information is set.
NOTE: To reset the clock, select the appropriate time
zone and press ENTER. The clock will revert to the
accurate time based on the time zone you selected.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Highlight “Clock Setup” and press ENTER.
To manually set the clock, change the time zone, or
change daylight savings information, use a ball point pen
or similar object to press the hour (H) or minute (M)
buttons on the radio. The Setup screen appears.
2. At the Clock Setup screen highlight the box next to
“Time Zone” and press ENTER.
3. Highlight the appropriate time zone for you location
and press ENTER to store your selection. Select “Done”
when finished.
Setting the Clock
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position.
Using the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object, press
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
NOTE: When you are traveling and enter a new time
zone, the cluck must be reset manually for the new zone.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of
SIRIUS audio service that is included with the factory-
installed satellite radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will
contact you to supply a welcome kit and to confirm
subscription information, including the set up of your
on-line listening account at no additional charge. For
further information, call the toll-free number 888-539-
7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com.
Please have the following information available when
calling:
Changing Daylight Savings Time
1. Highlight the box next to “Time” and press ENTER.
2. Select Daylight Savings when Daylight Savings Time
is in effect or Select Standard if Daylight Savings Time is
not being observed. press ENTER.
4
3. Select “Done” when finished.
Select “Done” to exit from the clock setting mode.
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel-
lite Radio. This service offers up to 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ENS/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Num-
ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ESN/SID Access With RSC Radios
Reception Quality
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACCESSORY
position and the radio ON, press the SETUP button and
scroll using the TUNE control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE control knob and the Sirius ID
number will be displayed. The Sirius ID number display
will time out in 2 minutes. Press any button on the radio
to exit this screen.
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
•
•
•
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
Selecting Satellite Mode (RSC Radios)
Press the SAT button until ЉSATЉ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Satellite Antenna
Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lug-
gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for 5 seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or
turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will
allow the program format type to be selected.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for 8 seconds before continuing
to the next. To stop the search, press SCAN a second time.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
4
INFO Button
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
Pressing the INFO button will cycle between Artist, Song
Title, and Composer (if available) information. Also,
pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional
3 seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of
the time (press and hold again to return to normal
display).
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the SELECT button
to display the Sirius ID number. This number is used
to activate, deactivate, or change the Sirius subscrip-
tion.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the channel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET Button — To Set the Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the channel will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to push-button memory {12 Satellite stations}.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
You may add a second channel to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
push-button memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VESா) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES)
Guide.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) in-
cludes the following components for rear seat entertain-
ment:
•
The LCD Screen swings up from the rear of the
armrest to allow the rear seat passenger(s) to view the
display.
•
A diagonal seven-inch liquid crystal display (LCD)
screen integrated into the center console armrest. The
screen features brightness control for optimum day-
time and nighttime viewing.
4
VES™ Video Screen
•
•
The touch screen radio and DVD player controls allow
front seat operation for easy setup in the case of
younger rear seat passengers.
A battery-powered infrared remote control that snaps
into a molded compartment in the center console
armrest upper storage bin.
Opening the Rear Seat Video Entertainment System
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
•
Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passen-
gers to listen to the same or individual audio sources.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks) on the rear of the
center console enable the monitor to display video
directly from a video camera, connect video games for
display on the screen or play music directly from an
MP3 player.
NOTE: Refer to your “Vehicle Entertainment System
(VES™) User Manual” for detailed operating instruc-
tions.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
Remote Sound Controls
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will
increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio or CD.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The button in the center of the left hand switch changes
CD’s on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This
button does not function for all other radios.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
4
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
CD Player
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
The controls for the heating/air conditioning and venti-
lation system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer
rotary dials inner push knobs. These comfort controls can
be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to balance the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating Controls
The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains
R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer
in the upper atmosphere.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
The instrument panel features four airflow registers. Two
registers are located on the outer ends of the instrument
panel and two are located in the center of the instrument
panel. These registers can be fully closed to partially
block airflow, and they can be adjusted to direct airflow
where the occupant desires.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate
the temperature of the air in-
side the passenger compart-
ment. The blue area of the
scale indicates cooler tem-
peratures while the red area
indicates warmer tempera-
tures.
Blower Control
4
There are four blower speeds.
Use this control to regulate
the amount of air forced
through the system in any
mode you select. The blower
speed increases as you move
the control to the right from
the OFF position.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser: located in front of the radiator, for an accumula-
tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mode Control (Air Direction)
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Mode control allows you to
choose from several patterns
of air distribution. You can
select either a primary mode,
as identified by the symbols,
or a blend of two of these
modes. The closer the control
is to a particular mode, the
more air distribution you re-
ceive from that mode.
Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount through the defrost and side window
demist outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct air
Defrost Mode
flow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
Floor, Mix and Defrost, or a blend of these modes even if
the Air Conditioning Snowflake button is not pressed.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To
improve fuel economy, use these modes only when
necessary.
of moisture build up inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, select the Outside Air position.
•
•
In order to prevent fogging, when the recirculation
button is press and the mode control is set to panel or
panel / floor, the A/C will engage automatically.
Recirculation Control
Use this button to choose be-
tween outside air intake or
recirculation of the air inside
the vehicle. A lamp will illu-
minate when you are in recir-
culate mode. Only use the re-
circulate mode to temporarily
block out any outside odors,
smoke, or dust and to cool the
interior rapidly upon initial
start up in very hot or humid
weather.
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection.
4
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control
air flow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be aimed, so that they are
directed toward the rear seat passengers.
Economy Mode
NOTE:
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
off the indicator light, and the A/C compressor. Move the
temperature control lever to the desired temperature.
•
Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
In cold or damp weather, the use of the recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Conditioning Operation
accomplish this, the system gathers information from the
cabin infrared sensor mounted between the sun-visors
and from various sensors located throughout the vehicle.
Use this button to engage the
Air Conditioning. A lamp will
illuminate when the Air Con-
ditioning System is engaged
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not en-
gage until the engine has been running for about 10
seconds.
Automatic Temperature Control
The controls on the climate control provide the system
with operator input. Other sensors take account of ve-
hicle speed, A/C pressure, outside temperature, and
engine cooling temperature. Using all of these inputs, the
system automatically adjusts airflow temperature, air-
flow distribution, airflow volume, and the amount of
outside air recirculation. This maintains a comfortable
temperature even under changing conditions.
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculate but-
tons at the same time.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)— If
Equipped
The Infrared Climate Control System automatically
maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the
comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger. To
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
Operation of the system is quite simple.
Automatic Blower Control
To engage the Automatic
Temperature Control, turn the
Blower Control Knob Indica-
tor to AUTO.
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the
Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat
occupants only.
2. Dial in the temperature you would like the system to
maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob.
4
Once the comfort level is selected, the system will main-
tain that level automatically using the heating system.
Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning,
the system will automatically make the adjustment.
Automatic Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate
the temperature of the air in-
side the passenger compart-
ment. Rotate the outer ring to
the desired numerical tem-
perature.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the OFF position on the blower control stops the system
completely and closes the outside air intake.
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.
NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any
time without affecting automatic operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air conditioning in this system is automatic.
Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button
while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the
control button to flash three times and then turn off. This
indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and request-
ing the air conditioning is not necessary.
Automatic Mode Control (Air Direction)
To engage Automatic Tem-
perature Control, turn the se-
lector fully left to AUTO.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser: located in front of the radiator, for an accumula-
tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
The system will automatically control recircu-
lation. However, pressing the Recirculation
Control button will temporarily put the system
in recirculation mode (ten minutes). This can
be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recircula-
tion will cause the LED in the control button to illumi-
nate. After ten minutes, the system will return to normal
AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off.
NOTE:
•
When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the recircula-
tion feature will be cancelled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
•
•
In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the Mix and Defrost modes to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation
will be disabled automatically if these modes are
selected.
these conditions are present and the Recirculation
Button is pressed the indicator will flash and remain
off. This tells you that you are unable to go into
recirculation mode at this time. If you would like to go
into Recirculation Mode, you must first move your
Mode Knob to Panel, Panel/Floor and then press the
Recirculation Button. This feature will reduce the
possibility of window fogging.
Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
Recirculation to be selected while in floor, defrost, or
defrost/floor mode. Attempting to use the recircula-
tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the
control button to blink and then turn off.
4
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Pre-
ferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
•
Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
Mode by pressing the Recirculation Button. However,
under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode,
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart that follows for details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Auto Climate Controls Chart
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost Mode
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct air flow.
Bi-Level Mode
4
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer
to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of this manual
for proper coolant selection.
Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount through the defrost and side window
demist outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months is
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vacation Storage
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
air and high blower setting. This will insure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com-
pressor damage when the system is started again.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
An air filter is included in the optional Security Group.
The filter will reduce, but not eliminate, diesel and
agricultural smells. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas-
senger compartment. The filter’s normal service life is
12,000 miles (20,000 km) or one year. The air filter change
schedule coincides with that for engine oil and filter. As
with oil changes, the interval is shorter for heavy duty
service or dusty conditions. See your authorized dealer
for service.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods as fogging may occur.
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is at each end of the
instrument panel. These nonadjustable outlets direct air
toward the side windows when the system is in either the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electric Rear Window Defroster
CAUTION!
Press this button, located on the Blower Control
knob, to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated side mirrors — if equipped. A light in the button
will illuminate to indicate the rear window defroster is
ON. The defroster automatically turns off after about 10
minutes of operation.
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the
rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp
instruments, chemically harsh or abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
Labels can be gently peeled off after soaking with
warm water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt.
Make sure all occupants have securely fastened their seat
belts.
Be sure to turn off the engine if you want to rest or
sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by inad-
vertently moving the gear selection lever or by
pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause exces-
sive heat in the exhaust system, resulting in over-
heating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or
fatal injuries.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
5
Automatic Transaxle
The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of Park.
Normal Starting
Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal.
Simply turn the ignition switch to the “START” position
and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
normal starting procedure.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
axle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-
erly, so follow the procedure carefully. See section 6
of this manual for jump starting instructions.
Ignition Key Position
Extremely Cold Weather (below Ϫ20°F or Ϫ29°C)
To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your dealer) is recommended.
Tip Start Feature — Automatic Transaxle Only
If Engine Fails to Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure, it may be flooded.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15
seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition key briefly
to START position, and release it. The starter motor will
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself
when the engine is running.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
Remote Start System — If Equipped
WARNING!
Remote start conveniently starts the engine from outside
the vehicle by using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key
fob while maintaining security. The system has a targeted
range of 328 ft. (100 m). The vehicle must be locked, the
deck lid and hood closed and the transmission in Park in
order to start the engine using the Remote Start button on
the key fob.
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
5
NOTE: Remote start requires Automatic Transaxle
equipped vehicles.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
How To Use Remote Start
To enter the Remote Start mode , depress the Remote
Start button twice on the key fob. The engine will start
and the vehicle will remain in the remote start mode for
a 15 minute cycle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
cycle, the key must be cycled to the ignition RUN
position and then repeat the start sequence.
To shut off the vehicle when it is in Remote Start mode,
press the remote start button once. In order to avoid
inadvertent shut downs, the one-time press to shut down
the vehicle will be disabled for two seconds after receipt
of a valid remote start request.
NOTE: When the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode,
power window and sunroof operation are disabled for
security.
The following conditions must be met before the engine
will remote start:
REMOTE START BUTTON
To exit the Remote Start mode , allow the
engine to run the cycle or depress the unlock
button to disarm the Vehicle Theft Security
Alarm and within one minute insert the key
into the ignition and turn the ignition to the RUN
position. The ignition must be in the RUN position in
order to drive the vehicle.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Automatic Transaxle in Park
All doors are closed
Hood is closed
Hazard Switch is off
Brake Switch is inactive
Key is not in the ignition
Battery is at an acceptable charge level
Panic button on key fob is not depressed
NOTE: The engine can be started two consecutive times
(two 15 minute cycles) by using the key fob. For a third
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle
speed.
•
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into
any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal
down while shifting out of Park.
5
WARNING!
Automatic Transaxle Shifter
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake/Transaxle Interlock System
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out
of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACC positions. Always depress the
brake pedal first, before moving the gear selector out of
PARK.
Four Speed or Six Speed (AutoStick) Automatic
Transaxle
The electronically controlled transaxle provides a precise
shift schedule. The transaxle electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle,
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the transaxle will not
shift out of park. Battery power is required to release the
brake/transaxle interlock system. There is an override
system that allows you to shift out of Park in case of loss
of power. To activate the override system, remove the cup
holder liner, insert a key, screwdriver or finger into the
front hole and push the lever forward. If this occurs
obtain service as soon as possible.
Reset Mode - Electronic Transaxle
The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal
conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
damage, the transaxle automatically shifts into second
gear. The transaxle remains in second gear (3rd gear with
six speed automatic) despite the forward gear selected.
Park (P), Reverse (R), and Neutral (N) will continue to
operate. This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven
to a dealer for service without damaging the transaxle.
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the OFF or ON positions.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
In the event that the problem has been momentary, the
transaxle can be reset to regain all forward gears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
•
•
•
Stop the vehicle and shift into Park (P).
WARNING!
Turn the key to OFF then restart the engine.
Shift into the desired range and resume driving.
Never use Park position on an Automatic Transaxle
as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply
parking brake fully when parked to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
NOTE: Even if the transaxle can be reset, it is recom-
mended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible
convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to
determine if the problem could recur.
“R” Reverse
Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
5
If the transaxle cannot be reset, dealer service is required.
Gear Ranges for Automatic Transaxle
“N” Neutral
“P” Park
Engine may be started in this range.
Supplements the parking brake by locking the transaxle.
The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to
use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
“D” Overdrive
For most city and highway driving, it provides smoothest
upshifts and downshifts and best fuel economy. When
frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the “D”
Overdrive position, such as when operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, (i.e. in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy
trailers), using the “3” position will improve performance
and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat build-up.
Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
“3” Drive
AUTOSTICKா — IF EQUIPPED
This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive. The transaxle
will operate normally in First, Second and Third while in
this range. The “3” position should also be used when
descending steep grades to prevent brake system dis-
tress.
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transaxle that offers six
manual ratio changes to provide you with more control.
AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and im-
prove overall vehicle performance. This system can also
provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat build up.
“L” Low
This range should be used for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, upshifts will
occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts
occur earlier than other gear range selections.
NOTE: The vehicle computer will over ride Overdrive
and “3” Drive ranges by changing shift points if the
transaxle operating temperature exceeds acceptable lim-
its. This is done to prevent transaxle damage due to
overheating.
AutoStick Shift Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
AutoStickா Operation
•
•
•
Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
By placing the selector lever one shift level below the ЉDЉ
position, it can be moved from side to side. This allows
the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears.
Moving the selector lever to the Left (-) triggers a
downshift and to the Right (+) an upshift. The gear
position will display in the instrument cluster on the
transaxle range indicator.
Avoid using speed control when Autostick is en-
gaged.
The transaxle will automatically shift up when maxi-
mum engine speed is reached while Autostick is
engaged.
NOTE: In Autostick mode, the transaxle will only shift
up or down when the driver moves the selector lever to
the Right (+) or Left (-).
•
•
transaxle shifting will be more noticeable when Auto-
stick is engaged.
5
If a low range is selected and the engine accelerates to
the rev limit, the transaxle will automatically select the
next higher ratio.
Holding the lever to (+) for at least one second, will
deactivate AutoStick. AutoStick is also deactivated
when the lever is shifted out of the (+) or (-) and into ЉD.Љ
•
•
If a downshift would cause the engine to over-speed,
that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.
Mostly the transaxle will stay in the manually selected
ratio, however.
AutoStickா General Information
•
You can start out in first or second gear. The system
will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle
speed.
If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transaxle will revert to the automatic shift mode and
remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
•
If a ratio other than 1st is selected and the vehicle is
brought to a stop, the transaxle control logic will
automatically select the 1st gear ratio.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
If the system detects a problem it will disable the
AutoStick mode and the transaxle will return to the
automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
place the gear selector in REVERSE. For vehicles
equipped with automatic transaxles, place the gear selec-
tor in the PARK position.
To release the parking brake, slightly pull up the handle
while pushing the lock button, and guide the lever
downward to its stop. The brake warning light in the
instrument cluster should go out.
PARKING BRAKE
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition on, the Brake Light in the instrument
cluster will come on.
NOTE: The parking brake lever will not release unless
the lever is pulled up slightly past its applied position.
NOTE: This light, when illuminated with parking brake
application, shows only that the parking brake is on. It
does not show the degree of brake application.
NOTE: If the light remains on with the parking brake
released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have
the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer im-
mediately.
NOTE: If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle
is moving, a chime will sound to alert the driver. The
chime will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle has
returned to a stop.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. For manual transaxle vehicles,
Parking Brake Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to set the
parking brake before placing the gear selector in Park,
otherwise the load on the automatic transaxle locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out
of Park. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels
toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on a uphill grade.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. How-
ever, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power system oper-
ating.
NOTE: You should always apply the parking brake
before leaving the vehicle.
5
WARNING!
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
•
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
injured. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A
child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving. Failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa-
bility, the remaining system will still function with some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
by increased pedal travel during application and greater
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the
malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
fluid in the master cylinder drops, the brake warning
indicator will light.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped
The Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle
stability and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the
brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
WARNING!
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. A significant decrease in braking performance
or vehicle stability during braking may occur. It will
take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your
vehicle harder to control. You could have an acci-
dent. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
WARNING!
•
•
•
Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natu-
ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency be-
yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
5
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not function-
ing. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake
System. The light will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interfer-
ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
•
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
•
•
•
the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
brake pedal pulsations,
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM –
ABS/TCS/BAS/ESP
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the
“Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Pro-
gram (ESP)” in this Section of this manual.
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad-
vanced electronic brake control system that includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System
(TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS) and Electronic Stability
Program (ESP). All systems work together to enhance
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions
and are commonly referred to as ESP.
Brake Assist System (BAS) — If Equipped
5
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in this Section of the
manual for more information about ABS.
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
Traction Control System (TCS) — If Equipped
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter-
acting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path. ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it
to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, ESP applies the brake
of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition
WARNING!
•
•
•
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
•
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” located in the instrument
cluster, starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESP system becomes active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator
Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) — If Equipped
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP cor-
rects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
mode. This mode should be used for almost all driving
situations. ESP should only be turned to “Partial Off”
for specific reasons as noted below.
WARNING!
•
•
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions.
PARTIAL ESP Mode
This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the
“ESP Control Switch.” When in “Partial Off” mode,
the TCS portion of ESP, except for the “limited slip”
feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled
and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will be illumi-
nated. All other stability features of ESP function
normally, with the exception of engine power reduc-
tion. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is
in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more
wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required
to gain traction.
ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
5
•
The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the “ESP
Control Switch”. This will restore the normal “ESP On”
mode of operation.
ESP Operating Modes
All ESP equipped vehicles can choose the following ESP
operating modes:
ESP ON
This is the normal operating mode for ESP. Whenever
the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
go out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warn-
ing Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in either the
ESP or BAS system, or both. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
WARNING!
In the Partial ESP mode, the engine torque reduction
and stability features are desensitized. Therefore,
the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is
unavailable.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the ESP switch. Once the situation
requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing
the “ESP Control Switch”. This may be done while the
vehicle is in motion.
NOTE:
•
The “ESP Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS Warning
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition
switch is turned ON.
•
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
ESP/BAS Warning Light and ESP/TCS Indicator
Light
The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with
the BAS indicator. The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” and the yellow “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster both come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should both
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
POWER STEERING
WARNING!
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
CAUTION!
5
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the
end of the steering wheel travel will increase the
steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided
when possible. Damage to the power steering pump
may occur.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power
steering pump may make noise for a short amount of
time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and
does not in any way damage the steering system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
WARNING!
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger-
ous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of
the front wheels. You could lose control of the
vehicle and possibly have an accident. Accelerate
slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be
poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
•
•
•
•
European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ЉPЉ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
5
Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: P215/65R15 95H.
High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
؆....blank....؆ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—ЉRЉ means Radial Construction.
—ЉDЉ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-
der specified operating conditions (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits).
5
Load Identification:
؆....blank....؆ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
of the tire.
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
5
Tire and Loading Information
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
Tire Placard Location
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” sec-
tion of this manual.
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.)
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865
lbs. (392 Kg).
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capaci-
ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
1. Safety—
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can
result in tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
5
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump-
tion.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
Tire Placard Location
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B”
pillar.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
5
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
CAUTION!
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
Prolonged use of limited use spare, or an incorrect
tire size on either front wheel, may damage transaxle
differential and result in loss of vehicle mobility.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
5
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold
tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire
placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly.
Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Prolonged use of limited use spare, or incorrect tire
size of front wheel, may damage the transaxle dif-
ferential and result in loss of vehicle mobility and
could result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) for
more than 30 seconds continuously.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Refer to: “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in Section 6 of this
manual for additional information.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
Life of Tire
Replacement Tires
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
•
•
•
Driving style
Tire pressure
Distance driven
5
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident result-
ing in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
that specified for your vehicle. Some combina-
tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance charac-
teristics, resulting in changes to steering, han-
dling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose control
and have an accident resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
•
•
Fast tire wear.
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
•
Vehicle pull to right or left.
•
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) — IF EQUIPPED
•
•
The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pres-
sure warning threshold for any reason, including low
temperature effects.
Base Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Operation – If Equipped
This is the Tire Pressure Monitoring System warn-
ing indicator located in the instrument cluster.
The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of
low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire
pressure warning has been illuminated, the tire pres-
sure must be increased to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the TPM warning lamp to
be turned off. The system will automatically update
and the TPM warning lamp will extinguish once the
updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15
mph (25 km/h) to receive this information.
•
•
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
5
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12 °F (6.5 °C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pres-
sure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for
more than 3 hours - and in outside ambient tempera-
ture. Refer to the “Tires – General Information” in this
section for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as
the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should
be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than 3 hours) placard of 35 °F (241
kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68 °F (20 °C) and the
measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20 °F (-7 °C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire pressure is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Light”. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Light” will still be ON. In this
situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Light” will turn
OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
•
•
3 Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four wheel
wells)
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
•
Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Premium System – If Equipped
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once
every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects. In
addition, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) will display a graphic of the pressure value(s)
with the low tire(s) flashing.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
•
Receiver Module
4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop flash-
ing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp will extin-
guish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been re-
ceived. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this infor-
mation.
Check TPM System Message
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 60 seconds, and an audible chime will sound
when a system fault is detected. The flash cycle will
repeat every ten minutes, without an audible chime, until
the fault condition no longer exists.
5
Low Tire Pressure Display
NOTE: A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Lamp to illuminate or the chime to
sound.
The EVIC will display the “CHECK TPM SYSTEM”
message for 3 seconds. This text message is then followed
by a graphic, with “- -“ displayed for the pressure value
indicating which of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sen-
sor(s) is not being received.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value. The system will automatically update, the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
a low pressure road tire, the next ignition key cycle will
still show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp” to be
ON, a chime to sound, and the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC) will still show the low tire pressure
value flashing on the graphic display. However, driving
the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h)
will display a “CHECK TPM SYSTEM” text message on
the EVIC. This text message will then be followed by a
graphic, with “- -“ in place of the flashing low pressure
value. For every subsequent key cycle, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Lamp” will be ON, a chime will sound, a
“CHECK TPM SYSTEM” text message will be display in
the EVIC, and the graphic display will have “- -“ in place
of the pressure value of the spare tire location. Once the
original road tire has been properly repaired, and put
back onto the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire.
The TPMS will update the graphic display on the EVIC
with a new tire pressure value instead of “- -“, and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp” will be OFF as long as
none of the road tire(s) are below the low pressure
warning threshold. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) for this update
to happen.
Check TPM System Display
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, and the ЉCHECK TPM SYS-
TEMЉ text message will no longer display.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare wheel and tire assembly it does not have a tire
pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, it will not be
monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
In the event that the compact spare tire is swapped with
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
NOTE:
•
CAUTION!
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do
not use tire sealant from a can, or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to
the sensors may result.
•
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
5
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale lamp.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the wheel rim sensor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
TIRE CHAINS
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom-
mended.
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
CAUTION!
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire side wall.
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/h).
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected before rotating. The suggested
rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the
diagram.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns.
5
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.4L and 2.7L ENGINES
no benefit over high quality regular gasoline or mid-
grade gasoline and in some circumstances may result in
poorer performance.
Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis-
sion regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy when using high quality regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
87. The use of premium gasoline is not
recommended. The use of premium gaso-
line will provide no benefit over high quality regular
gasoline, can impair engine performance and may dam-
age the engine.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the ap-
propriate octane rating for your engine) before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
3.5L ENGINE
The 3.5L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfac-
tory fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87 to 89. The manufac-
turer recommends the use of 89-octane for
optimum performance. The routine use of
premium gasoline is not recommended.
The use of premium gasoline will provide
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica-
tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which
define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced
emissions, engine performance, and durability for your
vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gaso-
lines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are
available.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
CAUTION!
2.4L and 3.5L Engines — If Equipped
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
5
NOTE: 2.7L Engine — If Equipped , is now rated for
E85 Ethanol use (EXCEPT CALIFORNIA EMISSION
STATES). Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door
label can operate on E-85. For more information, see
“Flexible Fuel” in this section.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
MMT In Gasoline
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num-
ber. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-
mends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not
his/her gasoline contains MMT.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
damage the emission control system.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-
lated gasolines.
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
•
The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
FLEXIBLE FUEL— 2.7L ENGINES ONLY (EXCEPT
CALIFORNIA)
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
E-85 General Information
5
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by the unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un-
leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline only powered vehicles.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel Requirements
CAUTION!
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
these two.
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
For best results, a refueling pattern that alternates be-
tween E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided.
When you do switch fuels, it is recommended that
ETHANOL FUEL (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
•
you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
than ⁄4 full
1
WARNING!
•
•
you do not add less than 5 gallons when refueling
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
a period of at least 5 minutes
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in drivability
during warm up.
NOTE: When the ambient temperature is above 90°F,
you may experience hard starting and rough idle follow-
ing start up even if the above recommendations are
followed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) and Gasoline Vehicles
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
patible parts.
Whether operating the vehicle on an E-85 ethanol fuel or
unleaded gasoline the engine oil requirements are the
same. Refer to “Engine Oil Selection in the “Maintenance
Procedures” section of this manual for the proper quality
and viscosity engine oil.
CAUTION!
NOTE: Your engine oil filler cap also describes the
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
correct engine oil to use.
5
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0° F. In the range
of 0° F to 32° F, you may experience an increase in the
time it takes for your engine to start, and a deterioration
in drivability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is
fully warmed up.
Maintenance
If you operate the vehicle using E-85 fuel, follow Sched-
ule B in the maintenance schedule section of this manual.
CAUTION!
Cruising Range
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than
gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel con-
sumption. You can expect your mpg and your driving
range to decrease by about 30% compared to gasoline
operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable
over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the
gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle’s
surface.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left rear
quarter panel of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.
Fuel Filler Door Features
Fuel Filler Door
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the prob-
lem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the prob-
lem will turn the MIL light off.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
CAUTION!
5
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“GASCAP” or “FUEL CAP OFF” message will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until
a “clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset
button to turn the message off. If the problem persists,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is
•
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This
is in violation of most state and federal fire
regulations and will cause the malfunction indi-
cator light to turn on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly
tightened.
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the Malfunction
Indicator Light will come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
Vehicle Curb Weight
2.4 L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3287 lbs (1491 kg)
2.7 L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3356 lbs (1522 kg)
3.5 L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3484 lbs (1580 kg)
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
If the seatbacks are folded for carrying cargo, do not
exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear
of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
•
•
•
•
Name of manufacturer
Month and year of manufacture
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
•
•
•
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Type of Vehicle
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Overloading
5
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
and rear GAWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it
is not over the GVWR.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Vehicle with a GVWR of 4480
EXAMPLE ONLY Front Axle Rear Axle
Empty Weight
1853 lbs
(841 kg)
1631 lbs
(740 kg )
Loading
Load (Including driver,
passengers, and cargo)
Total
271 lbs
579 lbs
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
(123 kg)
(263 kg)
2124 lbs
(963 kg)
2195 lbs
(997 kg)
2210 lbs
(1002 kg)
2285 lbs
(1036 kg)
GAWR
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” at-
tached to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR’s. This table is only an example.
A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that
neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been
exceeded.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
TRAILER TOWING
Common Towing Definitions
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
5
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
If you have any questions or concerns after reviewing
this section, please consult your dealer to for full details
on the towing capabilities of the vehicle.
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
Љloaded and ready for operationЉ condition. The recom-
mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings in-
clude a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a
driver).
Tongue Weight (TW)
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than or more
than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as
part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
a trailer and its cargo.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
Trailer Hitch Classification
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Class
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty
Class II - Medium Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
5
Engine/Transmission
2.4L / Auto
Max. Frontal Area
15 Sq. Ft. (1.4 Sq. M)2
15 Sq. Ft. (1.4 Sq. M)2
22 Sq., Ft. (3.7 Sq. M)2
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
1000 lbs (450 kg)
Max. Tongue Wt.1
100 lbs (45 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
2.7L / Auto
3.5L / Auto
1500 lbs (680 kg)
2000 lbs (907 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
1
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should
never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire–Safety Information
Section in this manual.
2
Enclosed trailers or open utility trailers with front shields/guards are not recommended for use with 2.4L or 2.7L
engine with automatic transmission. Please see the website, http://www-5.chrysler.com/searchapp/ui.jsp or your
dealer for additional information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Towing a trailer with a larger than recommended
frontal area could cause the engine to overheat or
cause severe engine damage under extreme condi-
tions.
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause
the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause
loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load
trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer
accidents.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual
for the maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv-
etrain components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
•
•
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage
your vehicle.
Incorrect tongue weight could result in increased
yaw or vehicle instability. A negative tongue weight
could unload the rear suspension of the tow vehicle
decreasing vehicle stability. Negative tongue weight
could cause the trailer to squat and potentially
become disengaged from the tow vehicle resulting in
a runaway trailer condition.
5
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
P for Park. Always, block or ЉchockЉ the trailer wheels.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
•
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-
sis structure or tires.
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve 10% of tongue weight as a percentage of
total trailer weight).
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
Towing Requirements — Tires
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
Tires–General Information section of this manual on
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
−
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
−
−
Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (450 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
5
CAUTION!
−
When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Infor-
mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for
proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
4 - Pin Connector
Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “3” range
should be selected.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
5
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule “B” in
section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change
intervals.
7- Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Make sure all trailer and vehicle lights are working
properly — including hazard flashers.
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
−
Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
If you have any questions or concerns after reviewing
this section, please consult your dealer to for full details
on the towing capabilities of the vehicle.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
towing with all four wheels on the ground)
−
City Driving
CAUTION!
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in neutral and increase engine idle speed.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the driv-
etrain will result.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
−
Refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more informa-
tion.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
272 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition
key removed and the vehicle locked.
The flasher switch is located on the instrument panel,
below the radio. Depress the switch and both cluster
indicators and all front and rear directional signals will
flash. Depress the switch again to turn Hazard Warning
Flashers off.
NOTE: With extended use, the flasher may wear down
your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
•
•
On the highways — Slow down.
In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle
with the engine at idle, when safe. Turn off the air
conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red)
mark for more than a minute, turn the engine off imme-
diately and call for service.
Hazard Warning Flasher
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 273
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle,
when safe. Turn the air conditioner off and wait until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. After
appropriate action has been taken, if the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately,
and call for service.
Engine Oil Overheating — 2.4L Engine Only (If
Equipped)
6
During sustained high speed driving or trailer tow up
long grades on hot day, the engine oil temperature may
become too hot. If this happens, the “HOTOIL” message
flashes, the vehicle speed will be reduced to 53 mph (85
km/h) until the engine oil temperature is reduced.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to Section 7, Maintenance, of
this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
NOTE: Engine speed is reduced to 53 mph (85 km/h) at
the maximum. You may, of course, reduce your speed
further if needed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
274 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor
in the trunk.
WARNING!
Spare Tire Stowage
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor
in the trunk.
•
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never put any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Spare Tire Removal
Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Spare Tire and Jack Stowage
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 275
Preparations For Jacking
•
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
Block both the front and rear
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK (automatic transaxle) or REVERSE
(manual transaxle). Turn OFF the ignition.
•
of the wheel diagonally oppo-
site the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
WARNING!
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the
vehicle is being jacked.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
276 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Instructions
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left
to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from
the jack assembly.
NOTE: The Jack Handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
points holds the jack handle in place.
Removing Jack Handle From Jack
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 277
6
Jacking Locations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
278 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in step 3.
3. There are two front jacking locations and two rear
jacking locations on each side of the body. The front
locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts, the rear
ones by two rectangular cutouts. For vehicles equipped
with plastic trim, the plastic has been cut away to expose
the jacking locations in the body.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
6. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel
covers where applicable off the hub. Install the spare
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid
the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten
the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack
head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the
wheel to be changed. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is securely engaged.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 279
WARNING!
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the
wheel nuts. When reinstalling original wheel, properly
align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the wheel
cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel nuts.
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the
tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
6
WARNING!
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while tightening the wheel nuts. Alternate nuts until each
nut has been tightened twice. Correct wheel nut torque is
100 ft. lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have
tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station.
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi-
ately.
11. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
pressure as required.
9. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and
stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using
the means provided.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
280 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES DUE TO A LOW
BATTERY
WARNING!
Jump-starting remote battery terminals are located under
the hood.
•
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.
The battery is stored between the left front head lamp
assembly and the left front wheel splash shield. Access is
through the splash shield.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transaxle cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of
start can be dangerous if done improperly, so
follow this procedure carefully.
•
Do not use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output that exceeds 12 volts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 281
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
the positive terminal of the booster battery. Refer to the
following illustration for jump-starting connections.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine ground (-)
of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure
you have a good contact on the engine ground. Refer to
the following illustration for jump-starting connections.
2. When boosting from a battery in another vehicle, park
that vehicle within booster cable reach but without
letting the vehicles touch. Set parking brake, place auto-
matic transaxle in PARK and turn ignition to OFF for
both vehicles.
WARNING!
6
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Remove the protective cover over the remote jump-
start positive battery post (+) in the engine compartment.
Connect one end of the jumper cable to the positive
battery post. Connect the other end of the same cable to
Jump-Starting Location
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
282 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobi-
lizer, turn the ignition switch to the ON position for 3
seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START
position.
NOTE: To access the battery for service or replacement
refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in the MAINTAIN-
ING YOUR VEHICLE section of this manual.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con-
trol, turn the system OFF before attempting to “rock” the
vehicle.
8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the se-
quence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse
and First gear. Usually the least accelerator pedal pres-
sure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective.
9. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote jump-
start positive battery post.
WARNING!
•
During cold weather when temperatures are be-
low freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought up above
freezing point before attempting jump-start.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 283
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
WARNING!
With Ignition Key
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause axle, tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping when you are stuck.
And don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
Automatic And Manual Transaxle
Front-wheel-drive vehicles must have the front wheels
elevated; all-wheel-drive vehicles must be hauled on a
flatbed truck.
All Transaxles
CAUTION!
6
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY posi-
tion, not in the LOCK position.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h). Do not spin the wheels continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when
towing. When securing vehicle to flat bed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
284 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the
transaxle remains in NEUTRAL.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
CAUTION!
Without The Ignition Key
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the driv-
etrain will result.
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. A dolly should be
used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised.
Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam-
age to the vehicle.
Battery power is required to release the brake/
transmission interlock system. There is an override sys-
tem that allows you to shift out of Park in case of loss of
power. To activate the override system, remove the cup
holder liner, insert a key, screwdriver or finger into the
front hole and push the lever forward.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
286 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
290 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
•
•
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-
tor Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be per-
formed.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
verter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose or improperly
installed. A GASCAP message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a ЉclickingЉ
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to
turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message
will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 291
might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected
twice in a row, the system will turn on the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the problem will turn
the MIL light off.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
For states, which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
7
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
292 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or
start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD
system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 293
Engine Oil
WARNING!
Checking Oil Level
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not
check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat
overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is
cold will give you an incorrect reading.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
7
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
294 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine as
indicated by the range markings, as described above,
on the engine oil dipstick will cause oil aeration,
which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase
in oil temperature. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following list to decide if any apply to you.
Engine Oil Dipstick — Gasoline Engines
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. The range markings will
consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a cross-
hatch zone that says “MIN” at the low end of the range
and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding one quart
of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated
range will result in the oil level at the full end of the
indicator range.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Day and night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
Stop and Go driving.
Extensive engine idling.
Driving in dusty conditions.
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 295
•
•
•
•
Trailer towing.
Engine Oil Selection (Gasoline Engines)
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer-
tified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler
Material Standard MS-6395.
Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service).
Off-Road or desert operation.
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow schedule “B—All
Engines” of the ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this
manual.
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine
oil at every interval shown on schedule “A” in the
maintenance schedule section of this manual.
7
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever occurs first.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
296 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-20 engine oil for 2.4L and 2.7L engines, is
recommended for all operating temperatures.
SAE 10W-30 engine oil for 3.5L engines, is recom-
mended for all operating temperatures.
10W-30 Oil Viscosity Chart
5W-20 Oil Viscosity Chart
These engine oils are designed to improve low tempera-
ture starting and vehicle fuel economy. Refer to the
engine oil filler cap for the preferred engine oil viscosity
grade for each vehicle.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 297
Synthetic Engine Oils
Engine Oil Filter
There are a number of engine oils being promoted as
either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use
such a product, use only those oils that are American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified and have the recom-
mended SAE viscosity grade. Follow the maintenance
schedule that describes your driving type.
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of this manufacturers engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-
ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consider-
ably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Materials Added To Engine Oils
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad-
ditives.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-
mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-
stalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug. Refer to the Engine data Label located under the
hood for the proper type of spark plug for use in your
vehicle.
7
Disposing of Used Engine Oil
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from
your vehicle. Used oil, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact your
dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice
on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in
your area.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
298 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Catalytic Converter
WARNING!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex-
haust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact any-
thing that can burn.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune up to manufacturers specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
ued operation of your vehicle with
a
severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 299
•
Do not idle the engine with any ignition coil connec-
tors disconnected for prolonged periods.
Air Cleaner Element (Filter)
Under normal driving conditions, replace the filter at the
intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you drive
the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions,
the filter element should be inspected periodically and
replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on Schedule
“B”.
Crankcase Emission Control System
Proper operation of this system depends on freedom
from sticking or plugging due to deposits. As vehicle
mileage builds up, the PCV valve and passages may
accumulate deposits. If a valve is not working properly,
replace it with a new valve. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE!
WARNING!
Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or
plugging deposits. Replace if necessary.
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Fuel Filter
7
A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the
speed at which a vehicle can be driven. Should an
excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank,
frequent filter replacement may be necessary. The fuel
filters are located inside the fuel tank. See your dealer for
service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
300 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance-Free Battery
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over a
battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water.
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment behind
the left front fender and is accessible without removing
the tire and wheel. Remote battery terminals are located
in the engine compartment for jump starting.
To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the
right and remove the inner fender shield.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 301
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.
Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion. Apply grease to posts and
clamps after tightening.
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage as battery
damage can result.
7
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
WARNING!
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar-
bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro-
tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid types.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.
Front Suspension Ball Joints
There are two front suspension lower ball joints that are
permanently lubricated. Inspect these ball joints when-
ever under vehicle service is done. Damaged seals and
their corresponding potentially damaged ball joints must
be replaced.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303
Body Lubrication
Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, liftgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
will remove accumulations of salt, waxes or road film
and help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. Make sure that
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to
avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
7
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the glass.
2. Push the release tab shown in the illustration and slide
the wiper blade assembly down along the arm. Gently
place the wiper arm on the windshield.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Install the new blade assembly onto the wiper arm tip
until it locks in place.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system,
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have a competent technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil
change or lubrication. Replace as required.
NOTE: Always refer to the wiper blade packaging for
specific installation instructions. Many wiper blade re-
placements fit multiple vehicles.
Windshield Washer Reservoir
The washer fluid reservoir is located engine compart-
ment and should be checked for fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer sol-
vent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for
a few seconds to flush out the residual water. Refer to the
appropriate engine diagram (at the beginning of this
section) for the location of the reservoir.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this
manual.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305
Cooling System
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
WARNING!
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
•
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled.
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
7
Coolant Checks
Selection Of Coolant
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
coolant type.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Coolant
CAUTION!
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review
these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Addi-
tive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT en-
gine coolants, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT cool-
ant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified
coolant as soon as possible.
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% rec-
ommended Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000
Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technol-
ogy), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use higher
concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
Ϫ34°F (Ϫ37°C ) are anticipated.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
WARNING!
•
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
7
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
Coolant Level
4 Cylinder Engines — the coolant bottle provides a quick
visual method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine idling and warm to normal
operating temperature, the level of the coolant in the
bottle should be between the “ADD” and “Full” lines,
shown on the bottle.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
6 Cylinder Engines — the level of the coolant in the
pressurized coolant bottle should be between the cold
and full range on the bottle when the engine is cold.
•
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month. When additional coolant is
needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added
to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
•
If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309
•
Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat
sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose rout-
ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or
moving component that may cause heat damage or
mechanical wear.
•
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
plings to make sure the are secure and no leaks are
present.
•
Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of degradation that could cause failure.
7
Fuel System Connections
Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are
designed with tubes and special connects, connections
and clamps which have unique material characteristics to
provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deterio-
rated gasoline.
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber
You are urged to use only the manufactures-specified
tubes, connections and clamps, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake System
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
sive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particu-
lar attention should be made to examining those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust
manifold.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte-
nance Section.
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they
are secure and no leaks are present.
WARNING!
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
NOTE: Often, fluids such as oil, power steering fluid,
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera-
tions to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. There-
fore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not neces-
sarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot
fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle
operation) should be noted before a hose is replaced
based on leakage.
Brake And Power Steering System Hoses
When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance,
inspect the surface of the hoses and nylon tubing for
evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard and
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be done
whenever the brake system is serviced and at every
engine oil change.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311
WARNING!
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point or unidentified as to specification, may
result in sudden brake failure during hard pro-
longed braking. You could have an accident.
Brake Master Cylinder
WARNING!
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning lamp is on.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked
when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
7
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the
brake fluid as seal damage will result!
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transaxle
3. Fully apply parking brake.
The automatic transaxle and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear
position ending with the lever in P (PARK). Wipe the area
around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of
dirt entering the transaxle.
All automatic transaxles (with the exception of the trans-
axle with the 3.5L engine, which has no dipstick and is
dealer service only) are equipped with a conventional
filler tube and dipstick. If fluid is added, it should be
added through the dipstick hole in the case.
5. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or warm. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82°C), which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has
been driven at least 15 miles (24 km). The fluid cannot be
comfortably held between the finger tips. Cold is when
the fluid is below 80°F (27°C).
Procedure For Checking Fluid Level
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transaxle and of the fluid.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated.
Remove dipstick and note reading.
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle with 3.5L
engine, should be checked only by a trained technician.
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the
upper two holes in the dipstick).
To properly check the automatic transaxle fluid level, the
following procedure must be used:
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be
between the lower two holes in the area marked
“COLD”.
1. The vehicle must be on level ground.
2. The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a
minimum of 60 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313
If the fluid level indicates low, add sufficient fluid to
bring to the proper level.
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill. Dirt and water in the transaxle can
cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water
from entering the transaxle after checking or replen-
ishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is
re-seated properly.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Special Additives
7
Do not add any materials (other than leak detection dyes)
to Automatic transaxle Fluid (ATF). ATF is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives.
The most common causes are:
•
•
•
•
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near sea coast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Washing
Special Care
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear
water.
•
•
•
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
•
•
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and
Tar Remover to remove.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
•
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315
•
Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
color of your vehicle.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabra-
sive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel
wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar
cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
finish.
7
Interior Care
WARNING!
Cleaning Interior Trim
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with Mopar Total Clean, then
Mopar Spot & Stain Remover if absolutely necessary.
Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use Mopar
Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter
window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use
scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch
the elements.
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
•
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
•
For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen-
tials products.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Glass Surfaces
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household-
type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.
Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Dry with a soft tissue.
Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders
Removal
Grab the rubber portion of the cupholder and lift up-
ward.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Cleaning
Instrument Panel Cover
Soak the rubber cupholder liner in a mixture of medium
hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap.
Let soak for approximately one hour. After one hour pull
the liner from the water and dip it back into the water
about six times. This will loosen any remaining debris.
Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water.
Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer
surfaces with a clean soft cloth.
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesir-
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
7
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
Installation
Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES/TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE
(TIPM)
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
A Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This
center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A label
that identifies each component may be printed on the
inside of the cover. Refer to the graphic below for
FUSES/TIPM location.
1
40 Amp
Green
Power Top Feed
2
3
4
5
6
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
AWD — If Appli-
cable, ECU Feed
CHMSL Brake Switch
Feed
Ignition Switch Feed
Trailer Tow
10 Amp
Red
IOD Sw/Pwr Mir/
Ocm Steering Cntrl
Sdar/Hfm
7
8
9
30 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Green
IOD Sense1
IOD Sense2
Power Seats
40 Amp
Green
Fuse and Relay Center (TIPM)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
10
Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Lt Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Description
CCN Power Locks
Power Outlet
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
20
Mini
Fuse
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
Description
IOD Feed Radio
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
IOD Feed Intrus
Mod/Siren
IGN RUN HVAC/
Compass Sensor
ENG ASD Relay Feed
3
PWR Sunroof Feed
Ign Run/Acc Inverter
Pwr run/Acc Outlet
RR
IOD CCN/ Interior
Lighting
RAD Fan Relay Bat-
tery Feed
IGN Run/Acc Cigar
Ltr/Sunroof
40 Amp
Green
Heated Mirror
7
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
10 Amp
Red
ENG ASD Relay Feed
2
IGN RUN Only ORC
Feed
IGN RUN ORC/OCM
Feed
Hot Car (No Fuse Re-
quired)
IOD Feed Mod-Wcm
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
40 Amp
Green
ASD Relay Contact
PWR Feed
PWR Amp 1 & Amp
2 Feed
20 Amp
Yellow
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
30
Mini
Fuse
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Description
Heated Seats
CAUTION!
•
•
When installing the Totally Integrated Power
Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover
is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the Totally
Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in
an electrical system failure.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Headlamp Washer
Relay Control
ENG ASD Control
Feed 1
ABS MOD/J1962
Conn/PCM
ABS Valve Feed
30 Amp
Pink
10 Amp
Red
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than
indicated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse contin-
ues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
ABS Pump Feed
Headlamp Washer
Control
110 Inverter
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321
VEHICLE STORAGE
LIGHTS BULBS — Outside
Bulb No.
Low Beam Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
High Beam Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker Light . . . 3157AK
Front Fog Light . . . . . . . 9145//H10 (Serviced at Dealer)
Center High Mounted
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery.
You may:
•
Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
Stop Light (CHMSL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED Assembly
Rear Tail/Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Rear Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157AK
Backup Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W16W (921)
License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
•
Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
7
LIGHT BULBS — Interior
Bulb Number
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . 578/W5W
Center Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . 578/W5W
Visor Vanity Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220
Glove Box Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JKLE14140
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for re-
placement instructions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
3. Gently pry the head lamp assembly away from the
fender as shown in the picture. This will free the ball stud
from its retainer in the fender. Pull the head lamp
assembly away from the vehicle.
Head Lamp Bulb Replacement
1. Open the hood and remove the two head lamp mount-
ing screws.
Gently Pry Out Head Lamp
4. Rotate bulb and connector1⁄4 turn counterclockwise.
Removing Head Lamp For Bulb Replacement
2. Remove the push-in fasteners by prying under the
head of the fasteners with a flat bladed tool.
5. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323
3. Rotate bulb and connector1⁄4turn counterclockwise.
4. Pull bulb off of connector and replace with a new one.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life.
CAUTION!
6. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
7. Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and rotate
clockwise1⁄4turn to secure.
8. Reinstall the head lamp assembly.
Fog Lamps
7
1. Access to the lamps through the lower fascia cutout is
limited.
2. We recommend you access the lamps by turning the
steering wheel to allow access and remove the inner
fender shield.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Tail Lamps, Rear Turn Signals And Backup
Lamps — Replacement
The tail lamps are a two piece design. The turn signal,
brake and tail lamps are located in the rear corner body
panel housing. The back up and tail lamps are located in
the trunk lid housing.
Changing the Rear Corner Tail Lamp Bulbs
1. Open the trunk and gently pull back the trunk liner
behind the tail lamp
Pull Back Trunk Liner
Split Tail Lamp Assembly
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325
2. Remove the two plastic wing nuts from the tail lamp
housing.
Changing the Trunk Lid Tail Lamps
1. With the trunk lid open, unplug the lamp assembly.
7
Location Plastic Wing Nuts
Trunk Lid Tail Lamp
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly outward pushing
gently on the studs from inside to disengage the lamp
housing.
2. Remove and replace the bulb.
3. Reinstall the lamp assembly locking in place.
4. Twist and remove socket from lamp.
5. Remove bulb from socket and replace.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
License Plate Lamp — Rear
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
1. Remove two retaining screws holding the lamp lens in
place.
1. Open the trunk lid to find the centrally located high-
mounted stop lamp.
Location and Removal of Rear License Lamp Lens
High-mounted Stop Lamp Bulb Replacement
2. Gently pry the lens loose.
2. Twist and remove socket from lamp.
3. Pull bulb from socket, replace and reattach the lamp
lens with the two retaining screws.
3. Replace the bulb and reinstall the lamp assembly
locking in place with a twist.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
Fuel (approximate)
2.4L, 2.7L and 3.5 Liter Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
16.9 gallons
64 liters
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
2.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
3.5 Liter Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified)
4.5 quarts
5.5 quarts
5.5 quarts
4.26 liters
5.2 liters
5.2 liters
Cooling System *
2.4 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile For-
7.7 quarts.
9.8 quarts.
11.6 quarts.
7.3 liters
9.3 liters
11.0 liters
mula) or equivalent.
2.7 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile For-
7
mula) or equivalent.
3.5 Liter Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile For-
mula) or equivalent.
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant
Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
Engine Oil (2.4 & 2.7 Liter)
Engine Oil (3.5 Liter)
Use API Certified engine oil. SAE 5W-20 is recommended. Refer to the en-
gine oil fill cap for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Mate-
rial Standard MS-6395.
Use API Certified engine oil. SAE 10W-30 is recommended. Refer to the
engine oil viscosity chart for the correct SAE grade meeting
DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Oil Filter (2.4 Liter)
Oil Filter (2.7 & 3.5 Liter)
Spark Plugs
Mopar 04884900AB or equivalent.
Mopar 05281090 or equivalent.
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com-
partment.
Fuel Selection (2.4 & 2.7 Liter)
Fuel Selection (3.5 Liter)
87 Octane
87 to 89 Octane
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329
Chassis
Component
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir
Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
332 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
control system. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated
under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
Stop and go driving.
S
C
H
E
Extensive engine idling.
D
U
L
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
Driving in dusty conditions.
E
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the
emission control devices and systems on your vehicle
may be performed by any automotive repair establish-
ment or individual using any automotive part, which has
been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of
California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
S
8
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
•
•
•
•
Trailer towing.
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
Off-road or desert operation.
Heavy Loading
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 333
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.
N
T
CAUTION!
E
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
N
A
N
C
E
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000 km) or 60 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
S
C
H
E
Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not
operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched-
ule ЉB.Љ
D
U
L
E
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi-
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add, if
required.
S
8
Once a Month
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
•
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
334 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
•
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake/
clutch master cylinder, and manual transaxle and add
as needed.
•
•
Check the manual transmission fluid level (if
equipped).
N
T
E
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
N
A
N
C
E
•
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
CAUTION!
At Each Oil Change
Do not check the automatic transaxle fluid. It must
be check by a trained service technician every 15,000
miles and if required only the recommended fluid
be added. Refer to the section “Fluids, Lubricants
And Genuine Parts” for the proper fluid.
S
C
H
E
•
•
•
•
Change the engine oil filter.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the brake hoses.
D
U
L
Inspect the CV joints (if equipped) and front suspen-
sion components.
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 335
Schedule “B”
Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions.
•
•
•
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
Off-road or desert operation.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
Heavy Loading
•
•
•
•
•
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
Stop and go driving.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.
Extensive engine idling.
S
C
H
E
Driving in dusty conditions.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000 km) or 60 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this manual.
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
D
U
L
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
E
S
•
Trailer towing.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
336 SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and oil filter, or at 3 months,
whichever comes first.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
3,000
(5 000)
6,000
(10 000)
9,000
(15 000)
12,000
(20 000)
15,000
(25 000)
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rotate tires.
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 337
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and oil filter, or at 3 months,
whichever comes first.
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Rotate tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Inspect brake linings.
18,000
(30 000)
21,000
(35 000)
24,000
(40 000)
27,000
30,000
N
T
(45 000)
(50 000)
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
Replace Spark Plugs: 2.4L Engine
X
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
338 SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and oil filter, or at 3 months,
whichever comes first.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
33,000
(55 000)
36,000
(60 000)
39, 000
(65 000)
42,000
(70 000)
45,000
(75 000)
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rotate tires.
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Inspect brake linings.
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 339
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and oil filter, or at 3 months,
whichever comes first.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Rotate tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Inspect brake linings.
48,000
(80 000)
51,000
(85 000)
54,000
(90 000)
57,000
60,000
N
T
(95 000)
(100 000)
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
Change Automatic Transaxle Fluid and Filter.
Replace Spark Plugs: 2.4L Engine
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, or
X
X
D
U
L
E
X
S
102,000 miles (170 000 km) whichever comes first.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
340 SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and oil filter, or at 3 months,
whichever comes first.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
63,000
(105 000)
66,000
(110 000)
69,000
(115 000)
72,000
(120 000)
75,000
(125 000)
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rotate tires.
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Inspect brake linings.
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 341
Miles
(Kilometers )
Change engine oil and oil filter, or at 3 months,
whichever comes first.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Rotate tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Inspect brake linings.
78,000
(130 000)
81,000
(135 000)
84,000
(140 000)
87,000
90,000
N
T
(145 000)
(150 000)
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
X
Replace Spark Plugs: 2.4L Engine
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
342 SCHEDULE “B”
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and oil filter, or at 3 months,
whichever comes first.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Rotate tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Replace Spark Plugs: 2.7L and 3.5L Engines
Flush and replace engine coolant if not done at 60
months. (Flush and replace engine coolant at 60
months, or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) whichever
comes first.
93,000
(155 000)
96,000
(160 000)
99,000
(165 000)
102,000
(170 000)
105,000
(175 000)
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
X
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B” 343
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and oil filter, or at 3 months,
whichever comes first.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Rotate tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Inspect brake linings.
Change Automatic Transaxle Fluid and Filter.
Replace Spark Plugs: 2.4L Engine
Replace the accessory drive belt every 120,000
miles (200 000 km).
108,000
(180 000)
111,000
(185 000)
114,000
(190 000)
117,000
120,000
N
T
(195 000)
(200 000)
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
X
D
U
L
E
X
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
344 SCHEDULE “A”
Schedule “A”
N
T
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and oil filter.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Rotate tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Inspect brake linings.
Replace Spark Plugs: 2.4L Engine
6,000
(10 000)
[6]
12,000
(20 000)
[12]
18,000
(30 000)
[18]
24,000
(40 000)
[24]
30,000
(50 000)
[30]
X
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
D
U
L
X
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A” 345
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and oil filter.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Rotate tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Inspect brake linings.
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, if
36,000
(60 000)
[36]
42,000
(70 000)
[42]
48,000
(80 000)
[48]
54000
60,000
N
T
(90 000)
[54]
(100 000)
E
[60]
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
D
U
L
X
X
not replaced at 102,000 miles (170 000 km).
Replace Spark Plugs: 2.4L Engine
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
346 SCHEDULE “A”
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and oil filter.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Rotate tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Inspect brake linings.
Replace Spark Plugs: 2.4L Engine
66,000
(110 000)
[66]
72,000
(120 000)
[72]
78,000
(130 000)
[78]
84,000
(140 000)
[84]
90,000
(150 000)
N
T
E
[90]
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
X
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A” 347
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and oil filter.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Rotate tires.
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
Inspect brake linings.
Change Automatic Transaxle Fluid and Filter.
Flush and replace engine coolant, 102,000 miles
(170 000 km) if not done at 60,000 miles
Replace Spark Plugs: 2.4L Engine
Replace Spark Plugs: 2.7L and 3.5L Engines
Replace the accessory drive belt every 120,000
miles (200 000 km).
96,000
(160 000)
[96]
102,000
(170 000)
[102]
108,000
(180 000)
[108]
114,000
120,000
N
T
(190 000)
[114]
X
(200 000)
[120]
X
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
D
U
L
X
X
E
S
X
X
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
348 SCHEDULE “A”
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
WARNING!
N
T
E
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
350 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-
pointment.
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 351
•
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
Owner’s name and address
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
Dealership name
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
Vehicle identification number
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer
Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
352 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Service Contract
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na-
tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
er’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
MOPARா PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 353
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In Canada:
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto
Safety Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY:
1–800–424– 9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
9
•
Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
http://www.NHTSA.gov.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
354 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, dia-
grams, and charts.
Call Toll Free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
•
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Or
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
•
•
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories estab-
lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 355
Treadwear
WARNING!
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
356 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
358 INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 359
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
360 INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 361
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
362 INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 363
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
364 INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 365
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
366 INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 367
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
368 INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 369
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
370 INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 371
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
